Pioneer VSX-LX70 User Manual

Page 1
Operating Instructions
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER
Page 2
IMPORTANT
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
CAUTION:
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
WARNING
Before plugging in for the first time, read the following
section carefully.
The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or region. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area where this unit will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V or 120 V) written on the rear panel.
D3-4-2-1-4_A_En
WARNING
To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment.
D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En
WARNING
This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire or shock hazard, do not place any container filled with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture.
D3-4-2-1-3_A_En
VENTILATION CAUTION
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation (at least 60 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and 30 cm at each side).
WARNING
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product, and to protect it from overheating. To prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed.
D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal. The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation).
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En
CAUTION
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation).
D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En
Operating Environment
Operating environment temperature and humidity: +5 ºC to +35 ºC (+41 ºF to +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light)
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En
This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period.
K041_En
For Australia Model
C67-7-3_En
Page 3
Voltage selector
edium size
screwd
er
n
You can find the voltage selector switch on the rear panel of multi-voltage models.
The factory setting for the voltage selector is 220 V. Please set it to the correct voltage for your country or region.
Before changing the voltage, disconnect the AC power cord. Use a medium size screwdriver to change the voltage selector switch.
220 V 230 – 240 V
M
riv
D3-4-2-1-5_E
Changing the TV format setting
If the System Setup menu is not displayed correctly, it may be that the TV system is set incorrectly for your country or region.
1 With the receiver in standby, press STANDBY/ ON while holding down the SETUP button.
2 Select PAL/NTSC using /, then select PAL or NTSC using /.
The display shows the new setting (PAL or NTSC).
Changing the frequency step
If you find that you cannot tune into stations successfully, the frequency step may not be suitable for your country/region. Heres how to switch the setting:
1 With the receiver in standby, press STANDBY/ ON while holding down the SETUP button.
2 Select FREQ.STEP using /, then select 9k or 10k using /.
The display shows the new setting:
9k
10k
Page 4
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.
Contents
01 Before you start
Checking what’s in the box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Installing the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Loading the batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
02 5 minute guide
Introduction to home theater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Listening to Surround Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Automatically setting up for surround sound
(MCACC & Full Band Phase Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup . . . . . 9
Playing a source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band
Phase Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Using Phase Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Using Full Band Phase Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
03 Connecting your equipment
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
When making cable connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
About the video converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Connecting your TV and DVD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Connecting your Blu-ray disc player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other
set-top box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other
video sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Using the component video jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting digital audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
About the WMA9 Pro decoder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting analog audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Connecting a component to the front panel inputs . . 18
Installing your speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Connecting the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Placing the speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
THX speaker system setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Connecting antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
AM loop antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Connecting external antenna to improve FM
reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Using an external antenna to improve AM
reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Plugging in the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
05 Listening to your system
Auto playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Standard surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Using the Home THX modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Using the Advanced surround effects . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Listening in stereo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Using Front Stage Surround Advance . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Using Stream Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Selecting MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Choosing the input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Using surround back channel processing . . . . . . . . . 32
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode . . . . . . . . . . 33
Using the genre synchronizing function. . . . . . . . . . . 34
06 Using the tuner
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Improving FM stereo sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Using Neural THX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Tuning directly to a station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Saving station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Naming station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
07 The System Setup menu
Making receiver settings from the System Setup
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Automatic MCACC (Expert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Surround back speaker setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Manual MCACC setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Fine Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Fine Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Full Band Phase Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Manual speaker setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Speaker Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
X-Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
THX Audio Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4
En
04 Controls and displays
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Operating range of remote control unit . . . . . . . . . . 25
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Page 5
08 Other connections
Connecting an iPod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Connecting your iPod to the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
iPod playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Watching photos and video content . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
About HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs . . . . . . . 53
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs . . . . . . . . 54
Speaker B setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Switching the speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Bi-amping your front speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Bi-wiring your speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Connecting additional amplifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
MULTI-ZONE listening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Making MULTI-ZONE connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Connecting an IR receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Switching components on and off using the 12 volt
trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display. . . 59 Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer plasma
display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output . . . . . 61
Advanced MCACC output using your PC . . . . . . . . . 61
09 HDMI Control
Making the HDMI Control connections. . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Setting the HDMI options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Setting the HDMI Control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Before using synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Synchronized amp mode operations . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Canceling synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
About HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
10 Other Settings
The Input Setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Input function default and possible settings . . . . . . 65
The Other Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Multi Channel Input Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
ZONE Audio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays. . . . . . . . . . 66
OSD Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
11 Using other functions
Setting the Audio options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Setting the Video options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Making an audio or a video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Playing a different source when recording . . . . . . . 70
Reducing the level of an analog signal. . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Using the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Switching the speaker impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Checking your system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Default system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
12 Controlling the rest of your system
Setting the remote to control other components . . . 74
Selecting preset codes directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Programming signals from other remote controls . . 74 Erasing one of the remote control button settings . . 75
Resetting the remote control presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Confirming preset codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Renaming input source names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Direct function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Multi Operation and System Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Programming a multi-operation or a shutdown
sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Using multi operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Using System off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Controls for TVs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Controls for other components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Operating other Pioneer components with this
unit’s sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
13 Additional information
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
No sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Other audio problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output. . . . . 83
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
iPod messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Surround sound formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Dolby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional . . . . . . . . . . . 87
About THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
About Neural Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Listening modes with different input signal formats. 89 Stream direct with different input signal formats . . . 92
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Cleaning the unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Our philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Pioneer Authorized Distributors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
En
5
Page 6
01
Before you start
Chapter 1:
Before you start
Checking what’s in the box
Please check that you’ve received the following supplied accessories:
• Setup microphone (cable: 5 m)
• Remote control unit
• AA/IEC R6P dry cell batteries x2
• AM loop antenna
• FM wire antenna
• Power cord
• Antenna adapter
• Flat-bladed converter plug
• These operating instructions
• Operating instructions for HOME MEDIA GALLERY (
VSX-LX70 only
)
Installing the receiver
• When installing this unit, make sure to put it on a level and stable surface.
Don’t install it on the following places: – on a color TV (the screen may distort) – near a cassette deck (or close to a device that gives off a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound. – in direct sunlight – in damp or wet areas – in extremely hot or cold areas – in places where there is vibration or other movement – in places that are very dusty – in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as a kitchen)
Loading the batteries
Caution
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:
• Never use new and old batteries together.
• Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries properly according to the marks in the battery case.
• Batteries with the same shape may have different voltages. Do not use different batteries together.
• Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or performance of batteries.
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or area.
6
En
Page 7
5 minute guide
Chapter 2:
5 minute guide
Introduction to home theater
Home theater refers to the use of multiple audio tracks to create a surround sound effect, making you feel like you’re in the middle of the action or concert. The surround sound you get from a home theater system depends not only on your speaker setup, but also on the source and the sound settings of the receiver.
This receiver will automatically decode multichannel Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround sources according to your speaker setup. In most cases, you won’t have to make changes for realistic surround sound, but other possibilities (like listening to a CD with multichannel surround sound) are explained in
system
on page 29.
Listening to Surround Sound
This receiver was designed with the easiest possible setup in mind, so with the following quick setup guide, you should have your system hooked up for surround sound in no time at all. In most cases, you can simply leave the receiver in the default settings.
• Be sure to complete all connections before connecting this unit to an AC power source.
1 Connect your TV and DVD player.
See
Connecting your TV and DVD player
this. For surround sound, you’ll want to hook up using a digital connection from the DVD player to the receiver.
2 Connect your speakers and place them for optimal surround sound.
Connect your speakers as shown in
speaker system
on page 19.
Listening to your
on page 14 to do
Installing your
Where you place the speakers will have a big effect on the sound. Place your speakers as shown below for the best surround sound effect. Also see
Placing the speakers
on
page 20 for more on this.
Front
Left (L)
Center (C)
Listening position
Surround Left (SL)
Front Right (R)
Subwoofer (SW)
Surround Back Left (SBL)
Surround Right (SR)
Surround Back Right (SBR)
3 Plug in the receiver and switch it on, followed by your DVD player, your subwoofer and the TV.
Plug the power cable into the AC outlet and switch on the
1
receiver.
Make sure you’ve set the video input on your TV to this receiver. Check the manual that came with the TV if you don’t know how to do this.
• Set the subwoofer volume to a comfortable level.
4 Use the on-screen automatic MCACC setup to set up your system.
See
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC
& Full Band Phase Control)
below for more on this.
5 Play a DVD, and adjust the volume to your liking.
Make sure that
DVD/LD
is showing in the receiver’s display, indicating that the DVD input is selected. If it isn’t, press
DVD
on the remote control to set the receiver
to the DVD input. In addition to the basic playback explained in
source
on page 9, there are several other sound options
you can select. See
Listening to your system
Playing a
on page 29
for more on this. See also
menu
Making receiver settings from the System Setup
on page 37 for more setup options.
02
Note
1 After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 15-second HDMI initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during this process. The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this process, and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking. When you set the HDMI Control mode to OFF, you can skip this process. For details about the HDMI Control feature, see
HDMI Control
on page 62.
7
En
Page 8
02
5 minute guide
2 Connect the microphone to the
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control)
The Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening area, taking into account
jack on the front panel.
Place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your normal listening position (use a tripod if possible). Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.
• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel ambient noise, speaker size and distance, and tests for both channel delay and channel level. After you have set up the microphone provided with your system, the receiver uses the information from a series of test tones to optimize the speaker settings and equalization for your particular room, and also to calibrate the frequency­phase characteristics of the speakers connected.
Make sure you do this before moving on to
source
on page 9.
Playing a
The Auto MCACC display appears once the microphone is connected.
Important
• Make sure the microphone and speakers are not moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.
• Before using the Auto MCACC Setup, the headphones should be disconnected and the iPod or HOME MEDIA GALLERY (
VSX-LX70 only
) function
should not be selected as an input source.
3 Make sure ‘ MCACC preset
4 Follow the instructions on-screen.
Make sure the microphone is connected, and if you’re using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched on and set to
Caution
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are output at high volume.
a comfortable volume level.
5 Wait for the test tones to finish then confirm the speaker configuration in the OSD.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
HDMI
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
BD TV CTRL
TUNER
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PROGRAM
TV VOL
CLEAR +
10
TUNE
ST ST
ENTER
TUNE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
SELECT
CH LEVEL
CLASS
ENTER
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
RETURNRETURN
VOL
DISC
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while
it’s doing this. If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the
speaker configuration check screen is being displayed, the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this case, you don’t need to select ‘ step 6.
door to access the
PARAMETER
AUDIO VIDEO
(TUNE)
PHONES
(ST) (ST)
ENTER
(TUNE)
SETUP
RETURN
1
DVD/LD
1. Auto MCACC
Surr Back System [Normal (default)]
Save SYMMETRY to [M1. MEMORY 1 ]
START
ENTER:Start :Cancel
Normal (default)
3
then select
5
MCACC SETUP MIC
MCACC SETUP MIC
MULTI – ZONE &
SIGNAL
STEREO/
SB ch
SOURCE/REC SEL
TUNER EDITSPEAKERS BAND
USB
MCACC SETUP MIC
SELECT
CONTROL ON/OFF
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO L RAUDIO
PROCESSING
F.S.SURR
-
55.0
dB
’ is selected,2 select an
4
START
.
OK
’ and press
jack:
ENTER
in
8
En
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Note
1• You can’t use the System Setup menu in either the main or sub zone when the iPod or HOME MEDIA GALLAERY ( selected. When you set ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 to ON (page 58), you can’t use the System Setup menu.
• If you cancel the Auto MCACC Setup, or leave an error message for over three minutes, the screen saver will appear.
2• If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through
setting
on page 40 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 4.
• If you have THX-certified speakers, select 3 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can rename it later in 4 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to
FRONT ALIGN
5 Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.
Data Management
). See
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
CUSTOM
on page 46).
and choose
SYMMETRY
on page 37 for more on this.
YES
. Select
for the
THX Speaker
CUSTOM
setting.
to save other correction curves (such as
VSX-LX70 only
) input source is
Surround back speaker
ALL CH ADJUST
and
Page 9
5 minute guide
PROGRAM
02
• With error messages (such as
noise!
or
Check Microphone
checking for ambient noise (see
using the Auto MCACC Setup
Too much ambient
) select
RETRY
after
Problems when
below) and verifying the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply select
GO NEXT
and
continue.
0.0
:Cancel
dB
DVD/LD
1. Auto MCACC
CHECK Front [ YES ] Center [ YES ] Surr [ YES ] SB [ YESx2 ] SW [ YES ]
OK
10:Next
0.0
:Cancel
dB
DVD/LD
1. Auto MCACC
Now Analyzing… ( 2/11)
Environment Check Ambient Noise [ OK ] Microphone [ ] Speaker YES/NO [ ]
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the actual speakers you have. If you see an error message (
1
ERR
) in the right side column (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a problem with the speaker connection. If selecting
RETRY
doesn’t work, turn off the power and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use to select the speaker and
/
to change the setting
/
(and number for surround back) and continue.
6 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press
ENTER
.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs more test tones to determine the optimum receiver settings for Channel Level, Speaker Distance, Standing Wave, Acoustic Cal EQ and Full Band Phase Control.
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.
7 The Auto MCACC Setup has finished! Press to go back to the System Setup menu.
2
RETURN
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Auto MCACC setup.
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using the
System Setup menu (starting on page 37).
3
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup
If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC Setup (too much background noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary. If there are any instructions showing in the front panel display, please follow them.
• Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the microphone. If this seems to be happening, switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup.
Playing a source
Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
TV VOL
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
HDMI
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
BD TV CTRL
TUNER
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
TV/DTV
MPX
AUDIO SUBTITLE
PHOTO
STATUSSTATUS
SIGNAL SEL
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
1 Switch on your system components and receiver.
Start by switching on the playback component (for example a DVD player), your TV
have one), then the receiver (press
• Make sure the setup mic is disconnected.
4
and subwoofer (if you
2 Select the input source you want to play.
You can use the input source buttons on the remote control,
SELECTOR
INPUT SELECT
5
dial.
, or the front panel
SELECT
INFO
REC
REC STOP
HDD
DISP
CH
T.DISP
SBch
STANDARD
THX
MCACC S.DIRECT
PHASE
RECEIVER
INPUT
VOL
MUTE
JUKEBOX
DVD
CH
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
ADV.SURR
).
Note
1 If you’re using the front panel display, the diagram in 2 You can also choose to view the settings from the 3• Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed. 4 Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver (for example, if you connected this receiver to the the
VIDEO 1
5 If you need to manually switch the input signal type press
input is now selected).
Listening to Surround Sound
MCACC Data Check
Manual speaker setup
SIGNAL SEL
screen. See
on page 48.
(page 32).
above indicates (in bold) how each speaker is displayed.
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
on page 37 for more on this.
VIDEO 1
jacks on your TV, make sure that
9
En
Page 10
02
5 minute guide
3 Press SURROUND’ and start playback of the source.
S.DIRECT (STREAM DIRECT
) to select ‘AUTO
1
Phase Cotrol OFF
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound DVD disc, you should hear surround sound. If you are playing a stereo source, you will only hear sound from the front left/right speakers in the default listening mode.
• See also information on different ways of listening to sources.
4 Use the volume control to adjust the volume level.
Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.
Listening to your system
on page 29 for
Sound source
• Rhythms blurred and difficult to hear
• Bass sound with loss of depth
• Sound of musical instruments with no reality
Phase Control ON
Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control
This receiver is equipped with the two types of functions that correct phase distortion and group delay: Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control. Activating Full Band Phase Control is strongly recommended because it also involves the effects of Phase Control. For details on each of these two features, refer to the following explanations.
Using Phase Control
During multichannel playback, LFE (Low-Frequency Effects) signals as well as low-frequency signals in each channel are assigned to the subwoofer or other the subwoofer and the most appropriate speaker. At least in theory, however, this type of processing involves a group delay that varies with frequency, resulting in phase distortion where the low-frequency sound is delayed or muffled by the conflict with other channels. With the Phase Control mode switched on, this receiver can reproduce powerful bass sound without deteriorating the quality of the original sound (see illustration below).
Sound source
• Rhythms with crystal-like clarity
• Bass sound with no loss of depth
• Sound of musical instruments with superb reality Phase Control technology provides coherent sound reproduction through the use of phase matching
optimal sound image at your listening position. The default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase Control switched on for all sound sources.
Press PHASE (PHASE CONTROL) to select PHASE CONTROL.
The
Front speaker
Subwoofer
Front speaker
Subwoofer
PHASE CONTROL
Listening
position
Sound muffled due to a delay in time
Listening
position
Original sound preserved with no loss of clarity
2
for an
PHOTO
T.DISP
SIGNAL SEL
THX
PHASE
SBch
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
STEREO/ F.S.SURR
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
indicator on the front panel lights.
10
En
Note
1• You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be set to output Dolby Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.
• Depending on your DVD player or source discs, you may only get digital 2 channel stereo and analog sound. In this case, the receiver must be set to a multichannel listening mode (see 2• Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they crest and trough together, resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough (as shown in the upper section of the diagram above) then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an unreliable sound image will be produced.
• The
PHASE CONTROL
• If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0˚). However, the effect you can actually feel when to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also recommended you try changing the orientation or the place of your subwoofer.
• Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to OFF. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the cutoff frequency to a higher value.
• If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not have a maximized
PHASE CONTROL
• The
– When the – When – When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to
PURE DIRECT
MULTI CH IN
Listening in surround sound
feature is available even when the headphones are plugged in.
mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:
mode is switched on.
is selected.
on page 29 if you need to do this) if you want multichannel surround sound.
PHASE CONTROL
THROUGH
in Setting the Audio options.
effect.
PHASE CONTROL
is set
Page 11
5 minute guide
02
Using Full Band Phase Control
The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers connected. Standard speakers designed exclusively for audio use generally reproduce sound with the divided frequency bands output from a speaker system consisting of multiple speakers (in case of typical 3-way speakers, for instance, the tweeter, the squawker (midrange), and the woofer output sound in the high-, middle-, and low­frequency ranges, respectively). Though these speakers are designed to flatten the frequency-amplitude characteristics across wide ranges, there are cases where the group delay characteristics are not effectively flattened. This phase distortion of the speakers subsequently causes group delay (the delay of low­frequency sound against high-frequency sound) during audio signal playback. This receiver analyzes the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers by calibrating test signals output from the speakers with the supplied microphone, therefore flattening the analyzed frequency-phase
characteristics during audio signal playback correction is made for a pair of left and right speakers. This correction minimizes group delay between the ranges of a speaker and improves the frequency-phase characteristics across all ranges.
Furthermore, the enhanced frequency-phase characteristics between channels ensure better
surround sound integration for multichannel setting.
Full Band Phase Control OFF
Tw eeter
Midrange
Woofer
Group Delay Characteristics
ms
1
– the same
2
Sound in the middle- and low-frequency ranges is delayed against the high-frequency sound due to group delay.
Full Band Phase Control ON
Tweeter
Midrange
Woofer
Group Delay Characteristics
ms
Hz
With the phase distortion corrected, the frequency-phase characteristics are improved across all ranges.
• Sound with live dynamics
• Sound of musical instruments with superb reality
• Sound so accurately reproduced that you can even hear the lip movement of the singer
• Speech heard with no loss of clarity
• Surround sound with excellent integration
PHOTO
T.DISP
SIGNAL SEL
THX
PHASE
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
• Press PHASE (PHASE CONTROL) to select FULLBAND PHASE.
3
Both the Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control functions are switched on. The
FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
indicator lights on the front panel display.
Hz
Note
1 To calibrate and analyze the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers, follow the procedures in Auto MCACC (see
surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control)
Select
ALL
BAND PHASE CTRL
the speakers are calibrated. 2 The original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the targeted characteristics after correction can be displayed graphically in the OSD (see speakers calibrated and the corrected characteristics of group delay can be displayed in 3-dimension on your PC (see
PC
3• The
when you perform the Auto MCACC setup with
feature is automatically switched on. Note that
Full Band Phase Control
on page 61).
FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
– When headphones are plugged in. – When the – When – When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to
PURE DIRECT
MULTI CH IN
is selected.
on page 45). Also, when your PC is connected to this receiver, the original characteristics of group delay of the
mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:
mode is switched on.
on page 8) or
CUSTOM
THROUGH
FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
. Upon calibration of the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers, the
FULLBAND PHASE
in Setting the Audio options.
in the System Setup (see
cannot be selected unless the frequency-phase characteristics of
Automatically setting up for
Full Band Phase Control
Advanced MCACC output using your
on page 45).
FULL
11
En
Page 12
03
Connecting your equipment
Chapter 3:
Connecting your equipment
This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This page explains the kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.
Rear panel
This illustration shows the VSX-LX70, however connections for the LX60 are the same except where noted.
5
1
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
OPTICAL
2
1
IN
(TV/
SAT
2
IN
(BD)
3
IN
(
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN
(
CD-R
ASSIGN- ABLE
1
IN (
DVD/
)
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
)
)
)
1
(CD)
3
4
4
21
ASSIGNABLE
41
DIGITAL
IN
MAIN
IN
ZONE2
HDMI
1
IN
CONTROL
6
IN
OUT
2
IN
IN
7
( LD
3
IN
4
IN
IN
(BD)
OUT
1
2
1
Y
DVD/
)
B
P
PR
2
Y
B
P
PR
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
(
1
IN
(BD)
2
IN
ASSIGN­ABLE
(
VIDEO/GAME
IR
DVD/LD
1
OUT
2
OUT
IN
31
)
Y
B
P
PR
3
Y
B
P
PR
1)
8
FM UNBAL 75
9
MONI­TOR OUT
10
S-VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MONI- TOR
11
OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEO AUDIO
OUT
DVD/LD
TV/SAT
VIDEO / GAME 1
OUT
OUT
IN
BD IN
IN
IN
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
AM LOOP
R
ANTENNA
ZONE2ZONE2
R L
12
PHONO
IN
L
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/ TAPE MD
IN
R
R
13
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
14
(
DC OUT 12V/ TOTAL 50 mA MAX
AUDIO
SURROUND BACK
1
Caution
• Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.
1 Optical digital audio output(s)
Use the
OUT1
and
(VSX-LX70 only) OUT2
jack for
recording to a CD or MiniDisc recorder.
See
The
Connecting digital audio sources
OUT1
jack is also used for MULTI-ZONE connections.
See
MULTI-ZONE listening
on page 56.
on page 17.
2 Optical and coaxial digital audio inputs (x6)
Use for digital audio sources, including DVD players/ recorders, digital satellite receivers, CD players, etc.
See also
The Input Setup menu
on page 64 to assign
the inputs.
3 LAN (10/100) terminal
For details, refer to the supplied operating
(VSX-LX70 only)
instructions for HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
4 HDMI connectors (x4)
(VSX-LX60)
(x5)
(VSX-LX70)
Multiple inputs and one output for high-quality audio/ video connection to compatible HDMI devices.
See
Connecting using HDMI
on page 52.
12 V TRIGGER
19
20
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
220 V 230 - 240 V
SELECTABLE
SPEAKERS
B
CENTER
)
PRE OUT
15
LR
FRONT
CENTER
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
SUR­ROUND BACK
(
)
Single
LR
L
L
SPEAKERS
FRONT
16
iPod
17
LR
RS-232C
2
MULTI CH IN
FRONT
A
A
IN
18
RL RLR L
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK /
5 Remote inputs (MULTI-ZONE and source)
Use for connection to an external remote control sensor for use in a MULTI-ZONE setup, for example.
See
Connecting an IR receiver
on page 58.
6 Control input/output
Use to connect other Pioneer components so that you can control all your equipment from a single IR remote sensor.
See
unit’s sensor
Operating other Pioneer components with this
on page 79.
7 Component video connections (x4)
Use the inputs to connect any video source that has component video output, such as a DVD recorder. Use the output for connection to a monitor or TV.
See
Using the component video jacks
on page 16.
8 AM and FM antenna terminals
Use to connect indoor or outdoor antennas for radio broadcasts.
See
Connecting antennas
on page 21.
9 MULTI-ZONE and source outputs
Use to connect a second amplifier in a separate room.
See
MULTI-ZONE listening
on page 56.
10 Composite and S-video monitor outputs
Use to connect monitors and TVs.
See
Connecting your TV and DVD player
on page 14.
AC IN
(
)
Single
12
En
Page 13
Connecting your equipment
11 Audio/video source inputs/(outputs) (x6)
Use for connection to audio/visual sources, such as DVD players/recorders, VCRs, etc. Each set of inputs has jacks
for composite video, S-video
See
video sources
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other
on page 16.
12 Stereo analog audio source inputs/(outputs) (x3)
Use for connection to audio sources such as CD players, tape decks, turntables, etc.
See
Connecting analog audio sources
13 Multichannel analog audio inputs
7.1 channel inputs for connection to a DVD player with multichannel analog outputs.
See
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs
page 53.
14 12 V trigger jacks
Use to switch components in your system on and off according to the input function of the receiver.
See
volt trigger
Switching components on and off using the 12
on page 59.
15 Multichannel pre-amplifier outputs
Use to connect separate amplifiers for center, surround, surround back and subwoofer channels.
See
also
Connecting additional amplifiers
Installing your speaker system
powered subwoofer connection).
16
iPod
input terminal
Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio or video source.
See
Connecting an iPod
17 RS-232C connector
Use for connection to a PC for graphical output when using Advanced MCACC or Full Band Phase Control.
See
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output
page 61.
18 Speaker terminals
Use for connection to the main front, center, surround and surround back speakers.
See
Installing your speaker system
19
AC IN
inlet
Connect the supplied power cord here.
See
Plugging in the receiver
20 Voltage selector switch
Use these to match the voltage coming into the receiver with the voltage in your country or region.
 Voltage selector
on page 3.
1
and stereo analog audio.
(total 50 mA max.)
on page 19 for
on page 51.
on page 19.
on page 23.
on page 18.
on
(x2)
on page 56 (see
on
When making cable connections
• To avoid hum, do not lay connected cables over the top of the receiver.
• When connecting optical cables, be careful when inserting the plug not to damage the shutter protecting the optical socket.
• When storing optical cable, coil loosely. The cable may be damaged if bent around sharp corners.
About the video converter
The video converter ensures that all video sources are output through all of the The only exception is HDMI and high-definition component video: since these resolutions cannot be downsampled, you must connect your monitor/TV to the receiver’s HDMI/component video outputs when
connecting these video sources. If several video components are assigned to the same
input function (see the converter gives priority to HDMI, component, S-video, then composite (in that order).
• For optimal video performance, THX recommends switching Digital Video Conversion (in
Video options
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
MONITOR VIDEO OUT
2
The Input Setup menu
on page 69)
OFF
.
jacks.
on page 64),
Setting the
03
Note
1 You must assign the input source to the S-video input to which you’ve connected your video component (see 2 If the video signal does not appear on your TV or plasma display, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in
Video options
on page 69)
OFF
.
The Input Setup menu
on page 64).
Setting the
13
En
Page 14
03
N
R
N
R
Connecting your equipment
Connecting your TV and DVD player
TV
VIDEOINS-VIDEO
IN
1
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
HDMI
OPTICAL
IN
1
IN (TV/
)
SAT
2
IN
IN
(BD)
3
IN (
DVR/
)
VCR 1
IN
4
IN (
)
CD-R
1
4
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
1
2
IN
(
DVD/
IN
)
LD
(CD)
2
IN
COAXIAL
OUT
ASSIGNABLE
41
DIGITAL
VSX-LX70
COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT VIDEO OUT
3
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
1
CONTROL
IN
OUT
2
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
LD
3
P
PR
4
2
IN
Y
(BD)
P
PR
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
FM UNBAL 75 W
IR
OUT
MONI- TOR OUT
(
)
1
DVD/LD
IN
(BD)
2
IN
ASSIGN­ABLE
21
OUT
Y
)
P
B
B
PR
3
IN
Y
B
B
P
PR
(
1)
VIDEO/GAME
31
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEOOPTICAL
2 4
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MONI­TOR OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEO AUDIO
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
BD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO / GAME 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
AUDIORL
ANALOG OUT
AM LOOP
R
ANTENNA
ZONE2ZONE2
R L
AUDIO
PHONO
IN
L
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
R
SURROU
1
12 V T
(
DC OUT 12V/ TOTAL 50 mA
1 Connect the
MONITOR OUT
video jack to a video
input on your TV.
Use a standard RCA/phono jack video cable to connect to the composite video jack, or for higher quality video, use an S-video cable to connect to the S-video jack.
2 Connect a composite or S-video output on your DVD player to the
DVD/LD VIDEO
or
DVD/LD S-VIDEO
input.
Connect using a standard video cable or an S-video cable.
3 Connect a coaxial-type1 digital audio output on your DVD player to the
COAXIAL IN 1 (DVD/LD
) input.
Use a coaxial cable designed for digital audio.
4 Connect the stereo audio outputs on your DVD player to the
DVD/LD AUDIO
inputs.
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable.
• If your DVD player has multichannel analog outputs, you can connect these instead. See also
the multichannel analog inputs
on page 53.
Connecting
Connecting your Blu-ray disc player
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
OPTICAL
1
IN (TV/
SAT
2
IN (BD)
3
IN (
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN (
CD-R
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
IN (
DVD/
)
LD
(CD)
2
IN
COAXIAL
VSX-LX70
)
)
)
1
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
HDMI
1
IN
CONTROL
IN
OUT
2
IN
IN
Y
(
DVD/
LD
3
IN
P
4
PR
21
4
IN
IN
Y
(BD)
P
OUT
PR
41
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
FM UNBAL 75 W
IR
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
(
)
1
DVD/LD
IN
(BD)
2
IN
ASSIGN­ABLE
21
1
OUT
Y
)
B
B
P
PR
3
2
IN
Y
P
B
B
PR
(
1)
VIDEO/GAME
31
MONI­TOR OUT
S-VIDEO
MONI­TOR OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEO AUDIO
GAME 1
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
BD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO /
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
AM LOOP
R
ANTENNA
ZONE2ZONE2
R L
AUDIO
PHONO
IN
L
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
R
SURROU
1
12 V T
(
DC OUT 12V/ TOTAL 50 mA
14
En
DVD player
The diagram shows a basic setup of this receiver together with a TV and DVD player, with S-video or composite video connections. Different TVs and DVD players may offer alternative connections. See also
component video jacks
on page 16 if your TV and/or DVD
Using the
COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT VIDEO OUT
3 2 4
S-VIDEOOPTICAL
AUDIORL
ANALOG OUT
player has component video inputs/outputs. If your DVD player offers multichannel analog audio outputs, see
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs
Note
1 If your DVD player only has an optical digital output, you can connect it to one of the optical inputs on this receiver using an optical cable. When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the player to (see
on page 53.
Blu-ray disc player
The Input Setup menu
on page 64).
Page 15
Connecting your equipment
N
R
M
The diagram shows a basic setup of this receiver together with a Blu-ray disc player, with S-video or composite video connections. See also
jacks
on page 16 if your Blu-ray disc player has component video inputs/outputs. If your Blu-ray disc player offers multi-channel analog audio outputs, see
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs
1 Connect a composite or S-video output on your Blu­ray disc player to the
Connect using a standard video cable or an S-video cable.
2 Connect an optical-type1 digital audio output on your Blu-ray disc player to the
Connect using an optical cable.
3 Connect the stereo audio outputs on your Blu-ray disc player to the
BD AUDIO
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable.
• If your Blu-ray disc player has multi-channel analog outputs, you can connect these instead. See also
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs
page 53.
Using the component video
BD VIDEO
or
BD S-VIDEO
OPTICAL IN 2 (BD)
inputs.
on page 53.
input.
input.
on
03
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box
Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’.
VSX-LX70
OPTICAL
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
1
IN (TV/
SAT
2
IN (BD)
3
IN (
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN (
CD-R
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
IN
(
DVD/
)
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
(CD)
)
)
)
1
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
HDMI
1
IN
CONTROL
IN
OUT
2
IN
IN
Y
(
DVD/
LD
3
IN
P
4
PR
21
4
IN
IN
Y
(BD)
P
OUT
PR
41
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
FM UNBAL 75 W
IR
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
(
)
1
DVD/LD
IN
(BD)
2
IN
ASSIGN­ABLE
21
1
OUT
Y
)
B
B
P
PR
3
2
IN
Y
P
B
B
PR
(
1)
VIDEO/GAME
31
MONI­TOR OUT
S-VIDEO
MONI­TOR OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEO AUDIO
DVD/LD
TV/SAT
VIDEO / GAME 1
OUT
IN
BD
IN
IN
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
AM LOOP
R
ANTENNA
ZONE2ZONE2
R L
AUDIO
PHONO
IN
L
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
R
SURROU
1
12 V T
(
DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA
DIGITAL OUT
VIDEO S-VIDEOAUDIORL
AV OUT
STB
1 Connect the audio/video outputs on the set-top box to the
TV/SAT AUDIO
and
VIDEO
inputs.
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable and a video or S-video
2
cable.
2 Connect an optical-type3 digital audio output from your set-top box to the
OPTICAL IN 1 (TV/SAT
) input.
Use an optical cable for the connection.
Note
1 If your Blu-ray disc player only has an coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using an coaxial cable. When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the player to (see
The Input Setup menu
2 See 3 If your set-top box only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial digital audio cable. When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top box to (see 4 If your satellite/cable receiver doesn’t have a digital audio output, you can skip this step.
on page 64 to assign the
S-VIDEO 2
input to the
TV/SAT
input function if you make this connection.
The System Setup menu
The Input Setup menu
on page 37.).
on page 64).
4
15
En
Page 16
03
R
F R
F
Connecting your equipment
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other video sources
This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and outputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video
3 If the device can output digital audio, connect an optical-type
the
Use an optical cable for the connection.
devices, including DVD/HDD recorders and VCRs.
VSX-LX70
OPTICAL COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
OPTICAL
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
1
IN (TV/
SAT
2
IN (BD)
3
IN (
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN (
CD-R
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
IN (
DVD/
)
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
)
)
)
1
(CD)
4
21
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
HDMI
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
41
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
1
CONTROL
IN
OUT
2
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
LD
3
B
P
PR
4
2
IN
Y
(BD)
B
P
PR
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
AUDIO
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
BD
IN
TV/SAT
1
IN
VIDEO / GAME 1
2
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
VIDEO AUDIO
AM LOOP
R
ANTENNA
ZONE2ZONE2
R L
AV IN
PHONO
IN
L
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SUR- ROUND
SURROUND BACK
1
12 V TRIGGER
(
DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
VIDEO S-VIDEO
L
L
CENTE
LR
2
)
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
FM UNBAL 75 W
IR
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
MONI­TOR
MONI-
OUT
TOR
(
)
1
DVD/LD
IN
OUT
(BD)
2
IN
ASSIGN­ABLE
21
OUT
Y
B
P
PR
3
IN
Y
B
P
PR
(
1)
VIDEO/GAME
31
S-VIDEO
VIDEOAUDIORL
S-VIDEO AUDIORL
AV OUT
IN
IN
)
1 23
Using the component video jacks
Component video should give superior picture quality when compared to composite or S-video. You can also take advantage of progressive scan video (if your source and TV are both compatible), which delivers a very stable, flicker-free picture. See the manuals that came with your TV and source component to check whether they are compatible with progressive-scan video.
• For a second recorder, use the
1
digital audio output from the recorder to
OPTICAL IN 3 (DVR/VCR1
VSX-LX70
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
IN
1
OUT2
MAIN
IN
2
LAN (10/100)
ZONE2
HDMI
OPTICAL
1
IN
CONTROL
1
IN
IN
(TV/
)
SAT
OUT
2
IN
2
IN
(BD)
IN
( VCR 1
IN
(
IN ( LD
IN
3
DVR/
4
CD-R
ASSIGN­ABLE
DVD/
COAXIAL
1
)
2
)
)
1
1
(CD)
4
2
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
41
3
IN
4
IN
OUT
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
P
B
PR
2
IN
Y
(BD)
P
B
PR
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
1
IN
2
IN
(
VIDEO/GAME
(
DVD/LD (BD)
ASSIGN­ABLE
IR
OUT
)
21
OUT
Y
P
B
PR
3
IN
Y
P
B
PR
1)
31
) input.
FM UNBAL 75 W
MONI­TOR
MONI-
OUT
TOR OUT
S-VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
1
IN
2
IN
DVR/VCR2
2
ANTENNA
AM LOOP
ZONE2ZONE2
R
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
BD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO / GAME 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
R L
VIDEO AUDIO
PHONO
IN
L
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
IN
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
AUDIO
R
R
SURROUND BACK
1
12 V TRIGGER
(
DC OUT 12V/ TOTAL 50 mA MAX
outputs.
L
L
CENTE
LR
2
)
16
En
Y
B
DVR, VCR, etc.
1 Connect the audio/video outputs of the video player/recorder to the
DVR/VCR1 AUDIO
and
VIDEO
P
PR
2
COMPONENT
VIDEO
TV
inputs.
Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the audio connection and a video or S-video cable for the video connection.
• For a second recorder, use the
2 If the device can record, connect the
AUDIO
and
VIDEO
outputs to the recorder’s audio/
video inputs.
Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the audio connection and a video or S-video cable for the video connection.
Note
1• In order to record, you must connect the analog audio cables (the digital connection is for playback only).
• If your video component doesn’t have a digital audio output, you can skip this step. 2 If your recorder only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial digital audio cable. When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to (see also
DVR/VCR2 IN
inputs.
DVR/VCR1
1 Connect the component video outputs of your source to a set of
Connect using a three-way component video cable.
Y
B
P
PR
COMPONENT
VIDEO
1
DVD player
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
The Input Setup menu
on page 64).
inputs.
Page 17
Connecting your equipment
E
2
L
L
L
03
• Since they are assignable, it doesn’t matter which component video inputs you use for which source. After connecting everything, you’ll need to assign the component video inputs—see
2 Connect the
The Input Setup menu
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
on page 64.
jacks to the
component video inputs on your TV or monitor.
Use a three-way component video cable.
Connecting digital audio sources
This receiver has both digital inputs and outputs, allowing you to connect digital audio components for playback and for making digital recordings.
Most digital components also have analog connections. See
Connecting analog audio sources
page if you want to connect these too.
VSX-LX70
MULTI-ZONE
OPTICAL
& SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
1
IN (TV/
SAT
2
IN (BD)
3
IN (
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN (
CD-R
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
IN (
DVD/
)
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
)
)
)
1
(CD)
41
2
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
HDMI
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
41
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
1
CONTROL
IN
OUT
2
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
LD
3
B
P
PR
4
2
IN
Y
(BD)
P
B
PR
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
IR
(
1
DVD/LD
IN
(BD)
2
IN
ASSIGN­ABLE
)
(
VIDEO/GAME
FM UNBAL 75 W
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
MONI­TOR
MONI-
OUT
TOR
)
OUT
21
OUT
Y
1
IN
B
P
2
IN
PR
3
IN
Y
P
B
PR
1)
31
S-VIDEO
on the following
AUDIO
ANTENNA
PHONO
AM LOOP
IN
ZONE2ZONE2
R
L
CD
IN
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
OUT
BD
IN
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
TV/SAT
VIDEO / GAME 1
VIDEO AUDIO
IN
IN
R
R
IN
SUB W.
OUT
SUR-
DVR/
ROUND
VCR 1
IN
R
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
R L
SURROUND BACK
1
12 V TRIGGER
(
DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
CENT
)
1 Connect an optical-type1 digital audio output on your digital component to the
OPTICAL IN 4 (CD-R
)
input.
Use an optical cable for the connection.
2 For recording equipment, connect one of the optical-type DIGITAL outputs to a digital input on the recorder.
Use an optical cable to connect to the (
VSX-LX70 only) OUT2 (OUT1
illustration).
2
is shown in the
DIGITAL OUT1
or
About the WMA9 Pro decoder
This unit has an on-board Windows Media™ Audio 9 Professional
playback WMA9 Pro-encoded audio using a coaxial or optical digital connection when connected to a WMA9 Pro­compatible player. However, the connected PC, DVD player, set-top box, etc. must be able to output WMA9 Pro format audio signals through a coaxial or optical digital output.
3
(WMA9 Pro) decoder, so it is possible to
1 2
OPTICAL COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL IN
CD-R, MD, DAT, etc.
Note
1• If your digital component only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial cable. When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to (see also
• The digital outputs from other components can be connected to any spare digital audio inputs on this receiver. You can assign them when setting up
the receiver (see also 2• You must switch
• In order to record some digital sources, you must make analog connections as explained in
3
• Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• With WMA9 Pro, sound problems may occur depending on your computer system. Note that WMA9 Pro 96 kHz sources will be downsampled to 48 kHz.
The Input Setup menu
ZONE 3 ON
in
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls
on page 64).
on page 58 to hear audio from the
Connecting analog audio sources
The Input Setup menu
DIGITAL OUT1
on page 64).
.
below.
17
En
Page 18
03
N
T
Connecting your equipment
1 Connect the analog audio outputs of the source
Connecting analog audio sources
This receiver features three stereo audio-only inputs. Two of these inputs have corresponding outputs for use with audio recorders.
One of the audio inputs ( turntable input which should not be used for any other type of component. This input also has a grounding terminal that most turntables require.
PHONO
) is a dedicated
component to one of the
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable.
• If you’re connecting a tape deck, MD recorder, etc., connect the analog audio outputs ( analog audio inputs on the recorder.
2
Turntables only:
the
PHONO
inputs.
• If your turntable has a grounding wire, secure it to the
AUDIO
inputs.
OUT
) to the
Connect the stereo audio outputs to
ground terminal on this receiver.
2
• If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the
CD
inputs
instead.
urntable
Connecting a component to the front panel inputs
VSX-LX70
PRE OUT
AUDIO
ANTENNA
PHONO
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MONI­TOR OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEO AUDIO
GAME 1
DVD/LD
TV/SAT
VIDEO /
AM LOOP
IN
ZONE2ZONE2
R
L
CD
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
BD IN
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
IN
IN
R
R
IN
SUB W.
OUT
SUR-
DVR/
ROUND
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
SURROUND BACK
1
12 V TRIGGER
L
R
(
DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
FM UNBAL 75
MONI­TOR OUT
S-VIDEO
CENTER
)
LR
FRONT
CENTER
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
SUR­ROUND BACK
(
)
Single
LR
L
L
FRONT
LR
2
MULTI CH IN
IN
iPod
RS-232C
FRONT
A
RL
CE
The front panel inputs comprise a composite video jack (
VIDEO
), an S-video jack (
inputs (
AUDIO L/R
(
DIGITAL
). You can use these connections for any kind of
S-VIDEO
), stereo analog audio
) and an optical digital audio input
audio/video component, but they are especially convenient for portable equipment such as camcorders, video games and portable audio/video equipment.
• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel door to access the front video connections.
PARAMETER
PHONES
AUDIO VIDEO
(TUNE)
(ST) (ST)
ENTER
(TUNE)
SETUP
RETURN
TUNER EDITSPEAKERS BAND
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
MULTI – ZONE & SOURCE/REC SEL
CONTROL ON/OFF
SIGNAL
SB ch
SELECT
PROCESSING
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO L RAUDIO
STEREO/ F.S.SURR
18
En
1
Tape deck, etc.
OUT
PLAY
IN
REC
R L
AUDIO IN/OUT
VIDEO OUTPUT
DIGITAL OUT
TV game, video camera, etc.
• Select these inputs using the
INPUT SELECTOR
VIDEO/GAME 2
.
INPUT SELECT
(remote) or
dial (front panel) to select
Page 19
Connecting your equipment
Installing your speaker system
To take full advantage of the receiver’s surround sound capabilities connect front, center, surround and surround back speakers, as well as a subwoofer. Although this is ideal, other configurations with fewer speakers—no subwoofer or no center speaker, or even no surround speakers—will work. At the very least, front left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your main surround speakers should always be connected as a pair, but you can connect just one surround back speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left surround back terminal). You can use speakers with a nominal impedance between 6 use speakers with an impedance of less than 8
Subwoofer
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
Front left
to 16 Ω (please see
).
Center
Switching the speaker impedance
Front
right
CAUTION
These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage. To prevent the risk of electric shock when connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables, disconnect the power cord before touching any uninsulated parts.
on page 71 if you plan to
03
OPTICAL
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
1
IN (TV/
SAT
2
IN (BD)
3
IN (
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN (
CD-R
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
IN
(
DVD/
)
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
(CD)
)
)
)
1
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
(
1
DVD/LD
IN
(BD)
2
IN
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
)
B
R
2
B
R
(
VIDEO/GAME
COMPONENT VIDEO
FM UNBAL 75
IR
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
)
2
1
OUT
Y
B
P
P
R
3
IN
Y
B
P
P
R
1)
31
MONI­TOR OUT
S-VIDEO
MONI­TOR OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEO AUDIO
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
BD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO / GAME 1
IN
OUT
VCR 1
IN
OUT
VCR 2
IN
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
HDMI
1
IN
CONTROL
IN
OUT
2
IN
IN
Y
(
DVD/
LD
3
IN
P
4
P
21
4
IN
IN
Y
(BD)
P
OUT
P
41
ASSIGNABLE
AUDIO
ANTENNA
PHONO
AM LOOP
IN
ZONE2ZONE2
R
L
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/ TAPE MD
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SUR-
DVR/
ROUND
DVR/
SURROUND BACK
1
12 V TRIGGER
R L
(
DC OUT 12V/ TOTAL 50 mA MAX
VSX-LX70
Surround left
Surround back left
Connecting the speakers
Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to match these up with the terminals on the speakers themselves.
SPEAKERS
B
SELECTABLE
AC IN
(
)
Single
PRE OUT
LR
FRONT
CENTER
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
SUR­ROUND BACK
(
)
Single
LR
L
L
FRONT
CENTER
LR
2
MULTI CH IN
)
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK /
RL RLR L
RS-232C
A
IN
iPod
Surround
right
Surround back right
Caution
• Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal. If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.
19
En
Page 20
03
Connecting your equipment
Bare wire connections
Make sure that the speaker cable you’re going to use is properly prepared with about 10 mm of insulator stripped from each wire, and the exposed wire strands twisted together (
fig. A
).
To connect a terminal, unscrew the terminal a few turns until there is enough space to insert the exposed wire (
fig. B
). Once the wire is in position, tighten the terminal
until the wire is firmly clamped (
fig. C
).
fig. A fig. B fig. C
10 mm
Important
• Please refer to the manual that came with your speakers for details on how to connect the other end of the speaker cables to your speakers.
Other connections
on page 51 provides greater detail on alternate speaker setups, such as using speaker system B (page 54), bi-amping (page 55) and bi­wiring (page 55).
• If you are using a THX certified subwoofer use the
THX INPUT
has one) or switch the filter position to
jack on the subwoofer (if your subwoofer
THX
on your
subwoofer.
Placing the speakers
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
• The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
• For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from the TV.
• When placing speakers near the TV, we recommend using magnetically shielded speakers to prevent possible interference, such as discoloration of the picture when the TV is switched on. If you do not have magnetically shielded speakers and notice discoloration of the TV picture, move the speakers farther away from the TV.
• If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a narrower angle.
• Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
• It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
• Surround and surround back speakers should be positioned 60 cm to 90 cm higher than your ears and titled slight downward. Make sure the speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly behind the listener than for home theater playback.
• Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
• To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below. Be sure all speakers are installed securely to prevent accidents and improve sound quality.
Front
left
Surround
left
Surround back Surround back
Single surround back speaker
Center
Listening position
left right
Subwoofer
Front right
Surround
right
Caution
• Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality, but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
20
En
Page 21
Connecting your equipment
N
The diagrams below show suggested surround and surround back speaker orientation. The first diagram (
A
) shows orientation with one surround back speaker (or none) connected. The second ( with two surround back speakers connected.
º
90º to 120
LS
LS
SB
fig. A fig. B
• If you have two surround back speakers THX recommends placing them together and the same distance from your listening position (see below).
THX speaker system setup
If you have a complete THX speaker system, follow the diagram below to place your speakers. Note that the
surround speakers ( indicates bi-polar radiating speakers) should output at an angle parallel to the listener.
L
fig. B
) shows orientation
LS
RS
RS
SBL
CR
0º to 60
SBL
SBR
RS
º
SBR
fig.
Connecting antennas
The supplied antennas provide a simple way to listen to AM and FM radio. If you find that reception quality is poor, an outdoor antenna should give you better sound quality—see
reception
VSX-LX70
OPTICAL
Connecting external antenna to improve FM
below.
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
1
IN (TV/
SAT
2
IN (BD)
3
IN (
DVR/ VCR 1
4
IN (
CD-R
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
IN (
DVD/
)
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
)
(CD)
)
)
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
FM UNBAL 75
IN
IR
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
HDMI
1
IN
CONTROL
IN
OUT
2
IN
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
3
IN
P
B
41
PR
21
4
IN
2
IN
Y
(BD)
B
P
OUT
PR
41
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
1
IN
2
IN
(
VIDEO/GAME
ASSIGN­ABLE
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
MONI­TOR
MONI-
OUT
DVD/LD
TOR
(
)
DVD/LD
OUT
(BD)
2
1
OUT
IN
31
TV/SAT
Y
1
IN
VIDEO /
P
B
GAME 1
2
IN
PR
3
Y
B
P
PR
1)
S-VIDEO
VIDEO AUDIO
AUDIO
ANTENNA
PHONO
AM LOOP
IN
ZONE2ZONE2
R
L
CD
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
BD
IN
CD-R/ TAPE MD
IN
IN
R
L
L
R
IN
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
SURROUND BACK
1
(
DC OUT 12V/ TOTAL 50 mA MAX
12 V TRIGGER
CENTER
LR
2
)
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
R L
AM loop antenna
1 Assemble the stand as shown in the illustration.
03
PRE OUT
LR
FRONT
CENTER
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
SUR­ROUND BACK
(
)
Single
LR
FRONT
MULTI CH IN
IN
iPod
RS-232C
FRONT
A
RL
CE
1
SL
Surround
SBL SBR
Surround back
SR
Surround
• If you have two surround back speakers THX recommends placing them together and the same distance from your listening position for the following THX modes:
MUSICMODE
See also
THX Select2 CINEMA, THX
and
THX GAMES MODE
THX Audio Setting
on page 50 to make the
.
settings that will give you the best sound experience when using the Home THX modes (page 30).
Note
1 Do not use any antennas other than the supplied AM loop antenna.
fig. A fig. B fig. C
• Bend the stand in the direction indicated (fig. A).
• Clip the loop into the stand (fig. B).
• It’s possible to fix the AM antenna to a wall (fig. C). Before fixing, make sure that the reception is satisfactory.
2 Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna wires.
3 Press the
AM LOOP
antenna terminal tabs to open
and insert one wire into each terminal.
4 Release the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires.
5 Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and point in the direction giving the best reception.
Avoid placing near computers, television sets or other electrical appliances and do not let it come into contact with metal objects.
21
En
Page 22
03
Connecting your equipment
FM wire antenna
Connect the FM wire antenna to the FM UNBAL 75
in the same way as the AM antenna.
For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.
4 Use pliers to secure the cable by pinching the clamps together, as shown.
Connecting external antenna to improve FM reception
Use an F connector to connect an external FM antenna using a coaxial 75
cable.
5 Push the body cover back on.
Antenna adapter
Using the antenna adapter
Use the antenna adaptor to terminate the coaxial cable used with an external FM antenna.
1 Cut and strip the coaxial cable to the specification shown in the diagram.
LOOP
22
En
Wire mesh Pull backWire
10 mm to 20 mm5 mm 9 mm
2 Open the adaptor body by pulling apart the tabs on either side.
Tabs
3 Insert the cable as shown, then use a pair of pliers to wrap the end of the wire around the binding post. Snip off the excess wire.
Page 23
Connecting your equipment
03
Using an external antenna to improve AM reception
To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m length of vinyl-coated wire to the
AM LOOP
terminals without
disconnecting the supplied AM loop antenna. For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally
outdoors.
Outdoor antenna
Indoor antenna
(vinyl-coated wire)
5 m to 6 m
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75
AM LOOP
Plugging in the receiver
After you’ve finished making all connections, plug the receiver into an AC outlet.
The type of cord and the plug converter which can be used depends on the power voltage in each region or country. Please make sure you use the correct cord and plug converter due to the possibility of fire or other hazard
if used incorrectly (see below).
AC power cord and converter plug use
Region Plug type
For European type region
Caution
Do not use this power cord set in Singapore and Malaysia.
For regions with two pin flat­bladed plug
European two-pin plug
Caution
• Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet, as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The power cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the power cord once in a while. If you find it damaged, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company for a replacement.
• Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this unit.
• Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than that described below.
• The receiver should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular use, e.g., when on vacation.
• Make sure the blue
STANDBY/ON
light has gone
out before unplugging.
1 Plug the supplied power cord into the
AC IN
socket
on the back of the receiver.
2 Plug the other end into a power outlet.
European two-pin plug with two-pin
flat-bladed converter plug
23
En
Page 24
04
Controls and displays
Chapter 4:
Controls and displays
Front panel
Illustration shows the VSX-LX70 front panel
1 624 7583
STANDBY/ON
VSX-LX70
24
En
ADVANCED
PHASE
MCACC
PHASE
AUTO SURR/
MCACC
STREAM DIRECT
POSITION
SELECTOR
CONTROL
INPUT
CONTROL
910 11 12 13
PARAMETER
AUDIO VIDEO
(TUNE)
PHONES
(ST) (ST)
ENTER
(TUNE)
SETUP
RETURN
DIGITAL PRECISION
PROCESSING
14
TUNER EDITSPEAKERS BAND
MCACC
USB
SETUP MIC
DIGITAL VIDEO
SCALER HDMI
HOME
STANDARD
ADVANCED
THX
SURROUND
SURROUND
15 16 17 18
MULTI – ZONE & SOURCE/REC SEL
CONTROL ON/OFF
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO L RAUDIO
SIGNAL SELECT
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
SB ch
PROCESSING
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
MASTER VOLUME
23 2521 22 2419 20
1
INPUT SELECTOR
Use to select an input source.
2
STANDBY/ON
Switches the receiver between on and standby. Power indicator lights when the receiver is on.
3
PHASE CONTROL
Control or Full Band Phase Control (page 10).
MCACC POSITION
MCACC presets (page 32).
AUTO SURR/STREAM DIRECT
Surround ( listening.
dial
– Press to switch on/off Phase
– Press to switch between
page 29
) or Stream Direct
Press to select Auto
(page 31)
4 Remote sensor
Receives the signals from the remote control (see
Operating range of remote control unit
on page 25).
5 Character display
See
Display
on page 26.
6
PHASE CONTROL
indicator
– Lights to indicate Phase Control or Full Band Phase Control is selected (page 10).
ADVANCED MCACC indicator
the MCACC presets (page 32) is selected.
Digital Precision Processing indicator
– Lights when one of
1
– Lights to indicate digital processing (for example, it disappears when Pure Direct (page 31) is on, or when listening through the multichannel analog inputs).
Note
1 The MCACC indicator does not light when the MCACC preset memory currently being selected has not been corrected with Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional or when
EQ
is set to
OFF
in the Audio parameter menu (see
Setting the Audio options
on page 68).
Page 25
Controls and displays
04
DIGITAL VIDEO SCALER
Resolution is set to a setting other than example, when the video input signal is upscaled) (page 68).
HDMI indicator
equipped component; lights when the component is connected (page 52).
7 Listening mode buttons
HOME THX
mode (page 30).
STANDARD SURROUND
decoding and to switch between the various
2
Pro Logic IIx and Neo:6 options (page 29).
ADVANCED SURROUND
the various surround modes (page 30).
8
MASTER VOLUME
9 Front panel controls
To access the front panel controls, push gently on the lower third portion of the panel with your finger.
10
SPEAKERS
Use to change the speaker system (page 54).
11
AUDIO PARAMETER
Use to access the Audio options (page 68).
12
VIDEO PARAMETER
Use to access the Video options (page 69).
13
TUNER EDIT
Use with (page 36).
14 BAND
Switches between AM and FM radio bands (page 35).
15 MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE/REC SEL controls
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see
ZONE listening
the sub zone from the main zone (see
ZONE controls
You will also need to use the recording a source (see
recording
16 SIGNAL SELECT
Use to select an input signal (page 32).
/
on page 70).
– Blinks when connecting an HDMI-
– Press to select a Home THX listening
to memorize and name stations for recall
on page 56) use these controls to control
on page 58).
indicator
– Press for Standard
– Use to switch between
dial
REC SEL
Making an audio or a video
– Lights when
PURE
MULTI-
Using the MULTI-
controls when
(for
17
SBch PROCESSING
Selects the surround back channel mode (page 32) or virtual surround back mode (page 33).
18
STEREO/F.S.SURR
Switches between the stereo playback mode (page 31) and the Front Stage Surround Advance mode (page 31).
19
PHONES
Use to connect headphones. When the headphones are connected, there is no sound output from the speakers.
20
SETUP
Press to access the System Setup menu (see page 37).
21
/// (TUNE/ST
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround sound system (see page 37). Use the to find radio frequencies and use stations (page 36).
22
RETURN
Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen.
23
USB
Connect a USB audio device for playback. See the separate manual for HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
24
MCACC SETUP MIC
Use to connect the supplied microphone.
25
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
See
Connecting a component to the front panel inputs
page 18.
jack
interface
) /
ENTER
(
VSX-LX70 only
jack
)
ST
TUNE
/
/
to find preset
Operating range of remote control unit
The remote control may not work properly if:
• There are obstacles between the remote control and the receiver’s remote sensor.
• Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the remote sensor.
• The receiver is located near a device that is emitting infrared rays.
• The receiver is operated simultaneously with another infrared remote control unit.
30
30
7 m
buttons
on
25
En
Page 26
04
Controls and displays
Display
Illustration shows the VSX-LX70 display
26
En
1
SIGNAL
AUTO
PCM
HDMI
DIGITAL
ANALOG
STREAM DIRECT
PRO LOGIC
2
ADV.SURROUND
THX STEREO
AB
SP
indicators
21 3 8765 10 11 12 13
2
L C R
SL S SR
SBL SB
LFE
N
eo
STANDARD
SLEEP
16
DIGITAL
WMA9 Pro
DTS
AAC
CD
CD-R
DSD
SBR
: 6
4 9
FULL BAND
2
HD
MULTI-ZONE
PCM
S.RTRV
TUNER PHONO iPod
Light to indicate the currently selected input signal. AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input signal automatically (page 32).
2 Program format indicators
These change according to which channels are active in digital sources.
L – Left front channel C – Center channel R – Right front channel SL – Left surround channel S – Surround channel (mono) SR – Right surround channel SBL – Left surround back channel SB – Surround back channel (mono) SBR – Right surround back channel LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the ((( ))) indicators light when
an LFE signal is being input)
3 Digital format indicators
Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format is detected (
DSDPCM
lights during DSD (Digital Stream
Direct) to PCM conversion with SACDs).
4
S.RTRV
Lights when the Sound Retriever is switched on
5
MULTI-ZONE
(page 68)
Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active (page 56).
6
FULL BAND
Lights when the Full Band Phase Control is switched on (page 10).
7
PHASE CONTROL
Lights when the Phase Control or Full Band Phase Control is switched on (page 10).
8 Sound processing indicators
Light according to the active Audio parameter(s)
and/or ANALOG ATT (page 71)
9
V.SB
.
Lights during Virtual surround back processing
10
TUNER
indicators
(page 68)
(page 33)
TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being received.
DNR
PHASE CONTROL
DIALOG E
SOUND
Hi-Bit/Sampling
DVD
BDP
191514 17 2018
ATT
TV
DVR
OVER
V.S B
VIDEO
HDMI
TUNED
STEREO
MONO
HMG
[ 1 ]
[ 2 ]
[ 3 ]
SR+ [ 4 ]
dB
STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being received in auto stereo mode.
MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set using the MPX button.
11
SOUND
Lights when any of the Midnight, Loudness or tone controls feature is selected (page 68).
12 Master volume level
Shows the overall volume level. –80dB indicates the minimum level, and +12dB indicates the maximum level.
13
SR+
Lights when the SR+ mode is switched on (page 60).
14
STREAM DIRECT
Lights when Direct/Pure Direct is selected (page 31).
15 Speaker indicators
Lights to indicate the current speaker system, A and/or B (page 54).
16 Listening mode indicators
THX – Lights when one of the Home THX modes is
selected. ADV.SURROUND – Lights when one of the
.
Advanced Surround modes has been selected. STEREO – Lights when stereo listening is switched
on (see Listening in stereo on page 31). STANDARD – Lights when one of the Standard
Surround modes is switched on (see Listening in surround sound on page 29).
17
SLEEP
Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page 71).
18 Matrix decoding format indicators
2 PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate 2 Pro Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding (page 29).
Neo:6
When one of the Neo:6 modes of the receiver
is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6 processing
19 Character display
.
Displays various system information.
20 Input source indicators
Light to indicate the input source you have selected.
(page 29)
.
Page 27
Controls and displays
Remote control
Illustration shows the VSX-LX70 remote control
TUNER
TUNE
ENTER
TUNE
TV CONTROL
TV CH
REC
REC STOP
DISP
T.DISP
STANDARD
THX
MCACC S.DIRECT
SYSTEM OFF
BD TV CTRL
DIMMER
GENRE
CLASS
CH
ENTER
LEVEL
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
INFO
JUKEBOX
HDD
CH
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV.SURR
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
ANALOG ATT
DISC
RETURN
VOL
MUTE
DVD
CH
SHIFT
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
for
INPUT
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
1
SELECT
2
CD
CD-R
DVD TV
HOME MEDIA
DVR2
DVR1
GALLERY
i Pod
SLEEP
+
SR
3
4
D.ACCESS
CLEAR +
10
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU
5 6
7
8
9
10
11
BAND
SETUP
PROGRAM
TV VOL
TV/DTV
MPX
AUDIO SUBTITLE
PHOTO
STATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
ST ST
INPUT
SELECT
SIGNAL SEL
PHASE
RECEIVER
The remote has been conveniently color-coded according to component control using the following system (press the corresponding input source button to access):
Green
– Receiver controls (see below)
Red
– DVD controls (page 78)
Blue
– Tuner controls (page 35)
Yellow
– iPod controls (page 51)
White
– Other controls (page 78)
1
RECEIVER
This switches between standby and on for this receiver.
2 INPUT SELECT
Use to select the input source (use
SELECT
).
3 Input source buttons
Press to select control of other components (see
Controlling the rest of your system
on page 74).
4 Number buttons and other receiver/component controls
Use the number buttons to directly select a radio frequency (page 35) or the tracks on a CD, DVD, etc.
DISC (ENTER)
can be used to enter commands for TV or
DTV, and also to select a disc in a multi-CD player. Press
RECEIVER
SLEEP
first to access:
– Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and
select the amount of time before sleep (page 71).
DIMMER ANALOG ATT
– Dims or brightens the display (page 71).
– Attenuates (lowers) the level of an
analog input signal to prevent distortion (page 71).
SR+
– Switches the SR+ mode on/off (page 60).
GENRE
– Automatically selects the most appropriate Advanced Surround mode for the genre of the source currently being played back (this feature is available only when a Pioneer DVD recorder supporting HDMI Control is connected to this receiver via HDMI) (page 34).
CH LEVEL
then use
Press
D.ACCESS
– Press repeatedly to select a channel,
/
to adjust the level (page 49).
TUNER
first to access:
– After pressing, you can access a radio
station directly using the number buttons (page 35).
CLASS
– Switches between the three banks (classes)
of radio station presets (page 36).
5 Tuner/component control buttons/
SETUP
These button controls can be accessed after you have selected the corresponding input source button (
DVR1, TV
explained from page 35. Press
, etc.). The
BAND
and
T.EDIT
tuner controls are
RECEIVER
DVD
,
first to access
the following controls:
A PARAMETER
– Use to access the Audio options
(page 68).
V PARAMETER
– Use to access the Video options
(page 69).
SETUP
– Use to access the System Setup menu
(page 37).
RETURN
– Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen (also use to return to the previous menu with DVDs or to select closed captioning with DTV).
6
///
(TUNE/ST) /
ENTER
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround sound system (see page 37) and the Audio or Video options (page 68 or 69). Also used to control DVD menus/ options and for deck 1 of a double cassette deck player. Use the
TUNE
/
use
ST
/
buttons to find radio frequencies and
to find preset stations (page 36).
04
27
En
Page 28
04
Controls and displays
7
TV CONTROL
These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the
TV CTRL
up to this system assign it to the button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the
CTRL
button (see page 74 for more on this).
TV – Use to turn on/off the power of the TV. TV VOL +/– INPUT SELECT TV CH +/–
8 Component control buttons
The main buttons (, , etc.) are used to control a component after you have selected it using the input source buttons.
The controls above these buttons can be accessed after you have selected the corresponding input source button (for example can be accessed when listening to the built-in tuner:
MPX
– Switches between stereo and mono reception of FM broadcasts. If the signal is weak then switching to mono will improve the sound quality (page 35).
DISP
– Switches between named station presets and
radio frequencies (page 36).
9
STATUS
Press to check selected receiver settings (page 72).
10
MULTI OPE
Use this button to perform multi operations (page 76).
11
SHIFT
Press to access the controls outlined in white boxes (for example, selected input source in the remote control LCD.
12
Press to turn on/off other components connected to the receiver (see page 74 for more on this).
13 Character display (LCD)
This display shows information when transmitting control signals.
The following commands are shown when you’re setting the remote to control other components (see
the rest of your system
INPUT SELECT
SOURCE
SETUP
choose the options below.
PRESET
page 74.
LEARNING
remote controls
MULTI OP
page 76.
SYS OFF
page 76.
buttons
button. Thus if you only have one TV to hook
TV CTRL
– Use to adjust the volume on your TV.
– Use to select the TV input signal.
– Use to select channels.
DVD, DVR1
– Indicates the setup mode, from which you
– See
– See
– See
or TV). The following controls
), or to display the currently
on page 74):
Selecting preset codes directly
See
Programming signals from other
on page 74.
Multi Operation and System Off
Multi Operation and System Off
input source
TV
Controlling
on
on
on
DIRECT F RENAME
page 76.
ERASE
settings
RESET
page 75.
READ ID
14
RECEIVER
Switches the remote to control the receiver (used to select the green commands above the number buttons (
ANALOG ATT
surround sound (page 8, page 37). With selects the MULTI-ZONE control (page 56), shown in the display as
15
VOL +/–
Use to set the listening volume.
16
MUTE
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).
17 Receiver controls
SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal (page 32). SBch – Use to select the surround/virtual back
channel mode (page 32). STEREO/F.S.SURR – Switches between the stereo
playback mode (page 31) and the Front Stage Surround Advance mode (page 31).
THX – Press to select a Home THX listening mode (page 30).
STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding and to switch between the various 2 Pro Logic IIx and Neo:6 options (page 29).
ADV.SURR – Use to switch between the various surround modes (page 30).
18
PHASE – Press to switch on/off Phase Control or Full
Band Phase Control (page 10). MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC presets (page 32).
S.DIRECT – Press to select Auto Surround (page 29) or Stream Direct (page 31) listening.
– See
Direct function
– See
Renaming input source names
– See
Erasing one of the remote control button
on page 75.
– See
Resetting the remote control presets
– See
Confirming preset codes
, etc.)). Also use this button to set up
RCV/Z2, RCV/Z3
on page 76.
SHIFT
.
on
on
on page 75.
, this
28
En
Page 29
Listening to your system
T.DISP
PHOTO
T.DISP
STEREO/
PHOTO
Chapter 5:
Listening to your system
05
Important
• The listening modes and many features described in this section may not be available depending on the current source, settings and status of the receiver. See
Listening modes with different input signal
formats
on page 89 for more on this.
Auto playback
There are many ways to listen back to sources using this receiver, but for the simplest, most direct listening option is the Auto Surround feature. The receiver automatically detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects
multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.
STEREO/
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
THX
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
MCACC S.DIRECT
PHASE
RECEIVER
While listening to a source, press /
STREAM DIRECT
SURR AUTO SURROUND
)2 for auto playback of a source.
shows briefly in the display before
S.DIRECT (AUTO
1
showing the decoding or playback format. Check the digital format indicators in the front panel display to see
how the source is being processed.
VSX-LX70 only
– When listening to the FM Radio, the
3
Neural THX feature is selected automatically (see
Using Neural THX
on page 35 for more on this).
Listening in surround sound
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in surround sound. However, the options available will depend on your speaker setup and the type of source you’re listening to.
If you connected surround back speakers, see also
surround back channel processing
on page 32.
Using
Standard surround sound
The following modes provide basic surround sound for stereo and multichannel sources.
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
THX
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
PHASE
RECEIVER
While listening to a source, press (
STANDARD SURROUND
If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode.
• If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround encoded, the proper decoding format will
automatically be selected and shows in the display.
With two channel sources
2
Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
, you can select from:
especially suited to movie sources
2
Pro Logic IIx MUSIC
especially suited to music sources
•2 Pro Logic IIx GAME especially suited to video games
2
PRO LOGIC
– 4.1 channel surround sound (sound
from the surround speakers is mono)
Neo:6 CINEMA
– 6.1 channel sound, especially
suited to movie sources
Neo:6 MUSIC
• to music sources
Neural THX
– 6.1 channel sound, especially suited
7
– Up to 7.1 channel sound, especially
suited to music sources
With multichannel sources, if you have connected surround back speaker(s) and have selected
can select (according to format):
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
when you’re using two surround back speakers)
2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC
4
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
STANDARD
).
– Up to 7.1 channel sound,
– Up to 7.1 channel sound,
6
– Up to 7.1 channel sound,
8
SBch ON
– See above (only available
– See above
, you
5
Note
1• Stereo surround (matrix) formats are decoded accordingly using for more on these decoding formats).
• The Auto Surround feature is canceled if you connect headphones or select the multichannel analog inputs. 2 For more options using this button, see 3
VSX-LX70 only
category other than Neural Radio is accessed. 4 In modes that give 6.1 channel sound, the same signal is heard from both surround back speakers. 5 If surround back channel processing (page 32) is switched
back speaker setting
6 When listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you can adjust: Center Width, Dimension, and Panorama. See Setting the Audio options on page 68 to adjust them. 7 When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center image effect (see Setting the Audio options on page 68). 8 VSX-LX70 onlyNeural THX can be selected with the FM input. Also, Neural THX can be selected with the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input.
– Neural THX is selected when Neural Radio is accessed with the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input. However, Stereo is selected when a
on page 40 is set to anything but
Using Stream Direct
Normal (default)
Neo:6 CINEMA
on page 31.
OFF
, or the surround back speakers are set to NO (this happens automatically if the
), 2
or 2
Pro Logic IIx
Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
becomes 2 Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound).
(see
Listening in surround sound
below
Surround
29
En
Page 30
05
T.DISP
PHOTO
T.DISP
PHOTO
Listening to your system
Dolby Digital EX
– Creates surround back channel sound for 5.1 channel sources and provides pure decoding for 6.1 channel sources (like Dolby Digital Surround EX)
DTS-ES
– Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback
with DTS-ES encoded sources
DTS Neo:6
– Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback
with DTS encoded sources
Using the Home THX modes
THX and Home THX are technical standards created by THX Ltd. for cinema and home theater sound. Home THX is designed to make home theater audio sound more like what you hear in a cinema.
Different THX options will be available depending on the source and the setting for surround back channel processing (see on page 32 for more on this).
Press
With two channel sources
repeatedly to select a matrix-decoding process for the
THX CINEMA
above for an explanation of each process):
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX
•2
PRO LOGIC+THX
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
THX GAMES MODE
With multichannel sources
repeatedly to select from:
THX CINEMA
your home theatre system using all the speakers in your setup
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX
movie sources, this allows you to hear 7.1 channel playback with 5.1 channel sources
THX Surround EX
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources
THX Select2 CINEMA
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources
Using surround back channel processing
STEREO/
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
THX
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
MCACC S.DIRECT
PHASE
RECEIVER
THX (HOME THX
mode (see
) to select a listening mode.
, press
THX (HOME THX)
Listening in surround sound
, press
THX (HOME THX)
– Gives you cinema-quality sound from
– Especially suited to
– Allows you to hear 6.1 or 7.1
– Allows you to hear 7.1
THX MUSICMODE
– Allows you to hear 7.1 channel
playback with 5.1 channel sources
THX GAMES MODE
– Allows you to hear 7.1 channel
playback from the output of a video game console
Using the Advanced surround effects
The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety of additional surround sound effects. Most Advanced Surround modes are designed to be used with film soundtracks, but some modes are also suited for music sources. Try different settings with various soundtracks to see which you like.
STEREO/
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
THX
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
MCACC S.DIRECT
PHASE
Press
ADV.SURR (ADVANCED SURROUND
repeatedly to select a listening mode.
ACTION
– Designed for action movies with dynamic
soundtracks
DRAMA
1
SCI-FI
special effects
MONOFILM
– Designed for movies with lots of dialog
– Designed for science fiction with lots of
– Creates surround sound from mono
soundtracks
ENT.SHOW
EXPANDED
TV SURROUND
– Suitable for musical sources – Creates an extra wide stereo field
mono and stereo TV sources
ADVANCED GAME
SPORTS CLASSICAL
ROCK/POP
– Suitable for sports programs
– Gives a large concert hall-type sound
– Creates a live concert sound for rock
and/or pop music
UNPLUGGED
EXT.STEREO
– Gives multichannel sound to a stereo
source, using all of your speakers
PHONES SURR.
headphones, you can still get the effect of overall surround.
RECEIVER
2
– Provides surround sound for both
– Suitable for video games
– Suitable for acoustic music sources
– When listening through
)
3
30
En
Note
1• If you only have one surround back speaker connected, 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX, THX Select2 CINEMA, THX MUSICMODE and THX GAMES MODE are not available. With 2-channel input signals, however, 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX can be selected.
• You can’t use the THX modes when headphones are connected.
2• Depending on the source and the sound mode you have selected, you may not get sound from the surround back speakers in your setup. For more on this, refer to Using surround back channel processing on page 32.
• If you press ADV.SURR when the headphones are connected, the PHONES SURR. mode will automatically be selected.
3 Use with Dolby Pro Logic for a stereo surround effect (stereo field is wider than Standard modes with Dolby Digital sources).
Page 31
Listening to your system
T.DISP
PHOTO
T.DISP
PHOTO
T.DISP
PHOTO
Tip
• When an Advanced Surround listening mode is selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the
EFFECT
parameter in
Setting the Audio options
on
page 68.
Listening in stereo
When you select through just the front left and right speakers (and possibly your subwoofer depending on your speaker settings). Dolby Digital, DTS and WMA9 Pro multichannel sources are downmixed to stereo.
While listening to a source, press for stereo playback.
Press repeatedly to switch between:
STEREO
• settings and you can still use the Midnight, Loudness, and Tone functions.
F.S.SURR FOCUS
Advance
F.S.SURR WIDE
Advance
STEREO
, you will hear the source
STEREO/
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
THX
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
MCACC S.DIRECT
PHASE
RECEIVER
STEREO/F.S.SURR
– The audio is heard with your surround
– See
Using Front Stage Surround
below for more on this.
– See
Using Front Stage Surround
below for more on this.
Using Front Stage Surround Advance
The Front Stage Surround Advance function allows you to create natural surround sound effects using just the front speakers and the subwoofer.
STEREO/
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
THX
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
MCACC S.DIRECT
PHASE
RECEIVER
F.S.SURR WIDE
effect to a wider area than
FOCUS position (Recommend)
Front left
speaker
– Use to provide a surround sound
mode.
Front right
1
speaker
Front right
speaker
FOCUS
WIDE position
Front left
speaker
Using Stream Direct
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary signal processing is bypassed, and you’re left with the pure analog or digital sound source (see
with different input signal formats
STEREO/
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
THX
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
MCACC S.DIRECT
PHASE
RECEIVER
1 While listening to a source, press S.DIRECT
(
AUTO SURR/STREAM DIRECT) to select the mode
you want.
Check the digital format indicators in the front panel display to see how the source is being processed.
AUTO SURROUND
DIRECT
– Sources are heard according to the
– See
Auto playback
settings made in the Surround Setup (speaker setting, channel level, speaker distance, acoustic calibration EQ, and X-curve), as well as with dual mono, the input attenuator, and any sound delay and hi-bit/hi-sampling settings. You will hear sources according to the number of channels in the signal.
PURE DIRECT
– Analog and PCM sources are heard
without any digital processing. from the Speaker B in this mode.
Stream direct
on page 92).
on page 29.
2
No sound is output
05
While listening to a source, press
STEREO/F.S.SURR
to select Front Stage Surround Advance modes.
STEREO
– See
Listening in stereo
above for more on
this.
F.S.SURR FOCUS
– Use to provide a rich surround sound effect directed to the center of where the front left and right speakers sound projection area converges.
Note
1 When using
surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control)
2 There are cases where a brief noise is heard before playback of sources other than PCM. Please select
F.S.SURR WIDE
, a better effect can be obtained if Auto MCACC Setup is performed. For more on this, refer to
on page 8.
AUTO SURROUND
Automatically setting up for
or
DIRECT
if this is a problem.
31
En
Page 32
05
T.DISP
PHOTO
CH
CH
DISP
Listening to your system
Selecting MCACC presets
• Default setting: If you have calibrated your system for different listening positions
1
, you can switch between settings to suit the kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).
While listening to a source, press
POSITION
).
Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets2 or to switch calibration off. See page 46 to check and manage your current settings.
MEMORY 1
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
SBch
STANDARD
THX
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
MCACC S.DIRECT
PHASE
RECEIVER
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
MCACC (MCACC
Data Management
on
Choosing the input signal
You need to hook up a component to both analog and digital inputs on the receiver to select between input
3
signals.
T.DISP
PHOTO
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
Press
SIGNAL SEL (SIGNAL SELECT
input signal corresponding to the source component.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
AUTO
– This is the default setting. The receiver
selects the first available signal in the following order:
HDMI; DIGITAL; ANALOG
ANALOG
DIGITAL
HDMI
– Selects an analog signal.
– Selects an optical or coaxial digital signal.
– Selects an HDMI signal.
SIGNAL SEL
THX
PHASE
RECEIVER
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
) to select the
.
4
PCM
– Only PCM signals are output.5 The receiver selects the first available signal in the following order:
HDMI; DIGITAL
When set to
DIGITAL
Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus decoding, lights with Dolby TrueHD or DTS-HD decoding, and
or
AUTO, 2
decoding,
WMA9 Pro
.
DIGITAL
lights with
2
DTS
lights with DTS
HD
lights to indicate
that a WMA9 Pro signal is being decoded.
Using surround back channel processing
• Default setting:
You can have the receiver automatically use 6.1 or 7.1 decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES), or you can choose to always use
6.1 or 7.1 decoding (for example, with 5.1 encoded material). With 5.1 encoded sources, a surround back channel will be generated, but the material may sound better in the 5.1 format for which it was originally encoded (in which case, you can simply switch surround back channel processing off).
The table below indicates when you will hear the surround back channel when playing various kinds of
sources (
=Sound plays through surround back
speaker(s)).
Press
SBch (SBch PROCESSING
the surround back channel options.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
SBch ON
• example, a surround back channel will be generated for 5.1 encoded material)
SBch AUTO
decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)
SBch OFF
SBch ON
T.DISP
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
PHOTO
SIGNAL SEL
THX
PHASE
RECEIVER
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
) repeatedly to cycle
– 6.1 or 7.1 decoding is always used (for
– Automatically switches to 6.1 or 7.1
– Maximum 5.1 playback
32
En
Note
1 Different presets might also have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system. These presets can be set in either of which you should have already completed. 2• You can’t use these settings when
• You can also press 3• This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), DTS (including DTS 96 kHz / 24 bit) and WMA9 Pro digital signal formats. With other digital signal formats, set to
• You may get digital noise when a LD or CD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To prevent noise, make the proper digital connections (page 17) and set the signal input to
• Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player. 4 When the 5• This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before AUTO recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.
• When PCM is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another input signal if this is a problem.
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control)
HDMI
/
to select the MCACC preset.
option in
Setting the Audio options
MULTI CH IN
ANALOG
is switched on, and they has no effect when headphones are connected.
(the
MULTI CH IN, TUNER, PHONO
DIGITAL
.
on page 68 is set to
THROUGH
on page 8 or
and
iPod
input functions are all fixed to
, the sound will be heard through your TV, not from this receiver.
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
ANALOG
).
on page 37,
Page 33
Listening to your system
05
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode
When you’re not using surround back speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround back channel through your surround speakers. You can choose to listen to sources with no surround back channel information, or if the material sounds better in the format (for example, 5.1) for which it was originally encoded, you can have the receiver only apply this effect
to 6.1 encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES. The table indicates when you will hear the virtual
surround back channel ( channel is active).
Type of source
Dolby Digital EX/DTS-ES 5.1 ch sources with
6.1 ch flagged
Dolby Digital/DTS and DVD-Audio 5.1 ch sources
Dolby Digital/DTS/PCM and DVD-Audio stereo sources
Analog 2-channel (stereo) sources
DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/Dolby Digital Plus/Dolby TrueHD/WMA9 Pro encoded and PCM 6.1 ch/7.1 ch sources
Dolby Digital Plus/Dolby TrueHD/WMA9 Pro (44.1 kHz/48 kHz) encoded and PCM 5.1 ch sources
DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/ DTS-EXPRESS/WMA9 Pro (88.2 kHz/96 kHz) encoded 5.1 ch sources
Dolby Digital Plus/Dolby TrueHD/WMA9 Pro (44.1 kHz/48 kHz) encoded stereo sources
DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/ DTS-EXPRESS/WMA9 Pro (88.2 kHz/96 kHz) encoded stereo sources
a. Only applicable when using the Virtual Surround Back mode. b.Not applicable when using the Virtual Surround Back mode. c. Sound is output from the surround back speakers only when d.Advanced surround mode may not be available depending on the input signal.
=Virtual surround back
SBch
Processing /
Virtual SB
mode
ON
AUTO
ON
AUTO
ON
AUTO
ON
AUTO
ON
AUTO
ON
AUTO
ON
AUTO
ON
AUTO
ON
AUTO
Multichannel
sources
THX Select2 CINEMA, THX MUSICMODE
Press
SBch (SBch PROCESSING
) repeatedly to cycle
the virtual surround back channel options.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
VirtualSB ON
– Virtual Surround Back is always used
(for example, on 5.1 encoded material)
VirtualSB AUTO
– Virtual Surround Back is
automatically applied to 6.1 encoded sources (for
1
example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)
VirtualSB OFF
– Virtual Surround Back mode is
switched off
Standard / THX
Stereo sources
2 Pro Logic II x2
c
c
c
c
b
b
b
Pro Logic Neo:6
a
a
a
or
THX GAMES MODE




is selected.
Advanced
surround
d
d
d
d
d
d
d
d
Note
1• You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the Surround Advance or Stream Direct mode is selected.
• You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the
page 48.
• The Virtual Surround Back mode cannot be applied to sources that do not have surround channel information.
Surr Back
setting is set to NO in the
THX
, stereo, Front Stage
Speaker Setting
on
33
En
Page 34
05
Listening to your system
Using the genre synchronizing function
This feature automatically selects the most appropriate Advanced Surround mode for the source currently being played back on a Pioneer DVD recorder supporting HDMI
Control connected to this receiver via HDMI. on HDMI Control, see
About HDMI
CD
CD-R
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
SLEEP
+
SR
BD TV CTRL
TUNER
DIMMER
GENRE
on page 53.
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
ANALOG ATT
1
For details
Press
RECEIVER
, and then press
GENRE
while the
source assigned to a genre is being played back.
The most appropriate Advanced Surround mode for the source being played back is automatically selected.
34
En
Note
1• This feature is available only when the source being played back is assigned to a genre. When the source has no genre assigned to, showing that this feature is not available.
• Make sure that HDMI Control is set to on page 53).
ON
. When
OFF
is selected,
CANNOT SELECT
appears showing that this feature is not available (see
NO GENRE
About HDMI
appears
Page 35
Using the tuner
Chapter 6:
Using the tuner
Listening to the radio
The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the frequency of the station you want, see
station
below. Once you are tuned to a station you can
memorize the frequency for recall later—see
station presets
RECEIVER SOURCE
CD
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
SLEEP
1 Press the
2 Use the
on page 36 for more on how to do this.
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
SELECT
CD-R
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
BD TV CTRL
TUNER
DIMMER
BAND
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
TUNER
D.ACCESS
CLEAR +
10
A PARAMETER TOP MENU
TUNE
ST ST
BAND
ENTER
SETUPSETUP
TUNE
PROGRAM
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
TV VOL
SELECT
ANALOG ATT
INFO
REC
TV/DTV
button to select the tuner.
button to change the band (FM or
AM), if necessary.
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.
3 Tune to a station.
There are three ways to do this:
Automatic tuning
To search for stations in the currently selected band, press and hold
TUNE
/
receiver will start searching for the next station, stopping when it has found one. Repeat to search for other stations.
Manual tuning
To change the frequency one step at a time, press
TUNE
/
.
High speed tuning
Press and hold
TUNE
/
Release the button at the frequency you want.
Tuning directly to a
Saving
INFO
REC
CH LEVEL
CLASS
ENTER
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
RETURNRETURN
VOL
TV/DTV
MPX
DISC
AUDIO SUBTITLE
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
PHOTO
DISP
SIGNAL SEL
THX
PHASE
RECEIVER
REC STOP
T.DISP
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
MUTE
JUKEBOX
HDD
DVD
CH
CH
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV.SURR
for about a second. The
for high speed tuning.
Using Neural THX
VSX-LX70 only
This feature uses Neural Surround™ technology to achieve optimal surround sound from FM radio.
• While listening to FM radio, press
S.DIRECT
for
Neural THX listening.
See
About Neural Surround
The
Neural THX
STANDARD
button.
mode can be selected also with the
on page 88 for more on this.
Tuning directly to a station
Sometimes, you’ll already know the frequency of the station you want to listen to. In this case, you can simply enter the frequency directly using the number buttons on the remote control.
1 Press the
2 Use the AM), if necessary.
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.
3 Press
4 Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of the radio station.
For example, to tune to If you make a mistake halfway through, press
twice to cancel the frequency and start over.
TUNER
BAND
D.ACCESS
button to select the tuner.
button to change the band (FM or
(Direct Access).
106.00
(FM), press 1, 0, 6, 0, 0.
D.ACCESS
06
Improving FM stereo sound
If the
TUNED
or
tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak, press
STEREO
the
MPX
button to switch the receiver into mono reception mode. This should improve the sound quality and allow you to enjoy the broadcast.
indicators don’t light when
35
En
Page 36
06
INFO
REC
Using the tuner
Saving station presets
If you often listen to a particular radio station, it’s convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station. This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. This receiver can memorize up to 30 stations, stored in three banks, or classes (A, B and C) of 10 stations each. When saving an FM frequency, the also stored.
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
HDMI
BD TV CTRL
DVD TV
HOME MEDIA
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
ZONE2/3
GALLERY
TUNER
RECEIVER
SLEEP
ANALOG
DIMMER
ATT
1 Tune to a station you want to memorize.
See
Listening to the radio
2 Press
The display shows
T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT
STATION MEMORY
memory class.
3 Press press
CLASS
ST /
to select one of the three classes then
to select the station preset you want.
You can also use the number buttons to select a station preset.
4 Press
After pressing
ENTER
.
ENTER
blinking and the receiver stores the station.
MPX
setting (see page 35) is
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PROGRAM
TV VOL
CLEAR +
10
TUNE
ST ST
ENTER
TUNE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
SELECT
CH LEVEL
CLASS
ENTER
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
RETURNRETURN
VOL
TV/DTV
MPX
DISC
AUDIO SUBTITLE
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
PHOTO
DISP
SIGNAL SEL
THX
PHASE
RECEIVER
REC STOP
HDD
CH
T.DISP
SBch
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
JUKEBOX
STEREO/ F.S.SURR
ADV.SURR
MUTE
DVD
CH
on page 35 for more on this.
).
, then a blinking
, the preset class and number stop
Tip
• To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1 to 3 and input four spaces instead of a name.
• Once you have named a station preset, you can press
DISP
when listening to a station to switch the display
between name and frequency.
Listening to station presets
You will need to have some presets stored to do this. See
Saving station presets
already.
1 Press
2 Press
TUNER
CLASS
is stored.
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A, B and C.
3 Press ST
/
want.
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote control to recall the station preset.
above if you haven’t done this
to select the tuner.
to select the class in which the station
to select the station preset you
36
En
Naming station presets
For easier identification, you can name your station presets.
1 Choose the station preset you want to name.
See
Listening to station presets
2 Press
The display shows
T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT
STATION NAME
cursor at the first character position.
3 Input the name you want.
Choose from the following characters for a name up to four characters long.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 0123456789
!”#$%&’()
Use
/
and
ENTER
+,–./:;<=>?@[ \ ]^_{|} ˜
to select a character,
to confirm your selection.
below for how to do this.
).
, then a blinking
[space]
/
to set the position,
Page 37
The System Setup menu
Chapter 7:
The System Setup menu
07
Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
The following section shows you how to make detailed settings to specify how you’re using the receiver (for example, if you want to set up two speaker systems in separate rooms), and also explains how to fine-tune individual speaker system settings to your liking.
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
SLEEP
HOME MEDIA
HDMI
BD TV CTRL
ZONE2/3
GALLERY
TUNER
RECEIVER
DIMMER
ANALOG
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PROGRAM
TV VOL
TV/DTV
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use the  RECEIVER
button to switch on.
• If headphones are connected to the receiver, disconnect them.
2 Press the
SETUP
RECEIVER
button.
on the remote control, then press
2
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the
///
buttons and
ENTER
to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press confirm and exit the current menu.
• Press
SETUP
at any time to exit the System Setup
menu.
3 Select the setting you want to adjust.
-
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
55.0
:Exit
CLEAR +
10
TUNE
ST ST
ENTER
TUNE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
SELECT
INFO
REC
RETURN
dB
CH LEVEL
CLASS
ENTER
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
RETURNRETURN
VOL
1
DISC
to
Surr Back System
• surround back speakers (see
setting
on page 40).
Manual MCACC
– Specifies how you are using your
Surround back speaker
– Fine-tunes your speaker settings
and customize the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see
Manual MCACC setup
FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
on page 40).
– Calibrates and automatically corrects the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers connected (see
Band Phase Control
Data Management
on page 45).
– Checks your MCACC presets
Full
and manages them through copying, renaming or deleting (see
Manual SP Setup
Data Management
on page 46).
– Specifies the size, number, distance and overall balance of the speakers you’ve connected (see
Input Setup
Manual speaker setup
on page 48).
– Specifies what you’ve connected to the digital, HDMI, component video and S-video inputs (see
Other Setup
how you are using the receiver (see
menu
The Input Setup menu
on page 64).
– Makes customized settings to reflect
on page 65).
The Other Setup
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
If your setup requires more detailed settings than those provided in
(MCACC & Full Band Phase Control)
customize your setup options below. You can calibrate your system differently for up to six different MCACC
presets positions depending on the type of source (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game
close to the TV).
Automatically setting up for surround sound
on page 8, you can
3
, which are useful if you have different listening
4
Auto MCACC
surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control)
– See
Automatically setting up for
on page 8 for a quick and effective automatic surround setup. See
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
below for a more detailed setup.
Note
1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the System Setup menu. 2• Note that when editing items in the before pressing
• You can’t use the System Setup menu when the iPod or HOME MEDIA GALLERY ( zone). When you set ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 to ON (page 58), you can’t use the System Setup menu. 3 These are stored in memory and referred to as 4 You may also want to have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system.
SETUP
.
Manual MCACC
MEMORY1–6
menu, you will need to first specify the MCACC preset you want to adjust by pressing
VSX-LX70 only
(or M1–6) until you rename them in
) input source is selected (in either the main or sub
Data Management
on page 46.
MCACC
37
En
Page 38
07
The System Setup menu
Important
• Make sure the microphone/speakers are not moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.
• The screen saver will automatically appear after three minutes of inactivity.
Caution
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are output at high volume.
1 Select ‘ then press
If the System Setup screen is not displayed, refer to
Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
above.
2 Make sure ‘ MCACC preset
For a fully customized Auto MCACC setup, select
CUSTOM
DVD/LD
1. Auto MCACC
Output Setup [Normal (default)]
Save SYMMETRY to [ M1. MEMORY 1 ]
CUSTOM
ENTER:Next
Auto MCACC
ENTER
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
Normal (default)
3
then select
and set the following parameters using
-
55.0
dB
: Cancel
Custom Menu
’ from the System Setup menu
.
DVD/LD
-
55.0
dB
1. Auto MCACC
Surr Back System [Normal (default)]
Save SYMMETRY to [M1. MEMORY 1 ]
START
:Exit
ENTER:Start :Cancel
’ is selected,2 select an
4
START
.
-
55.0
dB
DVD/LD
1. Auto MCACC
Custom Menu ALL
Speaker Setting
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
EQ Pro. & S-Wave
FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
ENTER:Next
– The default is
DVD/LD
1. Auto MCACC
SYMMETRY
M1.MEMORY 1
ALL CH ADJ [ M2.MEMORY 2 ] FRONT ALIGN [ M3.MEMORY 3 ] THX Speaker [ NO ]
[ START ]
: Return
ENTER:Start
ALL
(recommended),
-
55.0
dB
/
-
: Return
but you can limit the system calibration to only one
6
setting (to save time) if you want. options are
Setting Pro. & S-Wave
ALL, Keep SP SYSTEM
,
Channel Level, Speaker Distance
.
The available
,7
Speaker
and
55.0
EQ Type (only available when the Custom Menu
above is
EQ Pro. & S-Wave) – This determines how
the frequency balance is adjusted.
After a single calibration is performed, each of the following three correction curves can be stored
1
separately in the MCACC memory.
SYMMETRY
implements symmetric correction for each pair of left and right speakers to flatten the frequency amplitude characteristics.
ALL CH ADJUST
is a ‘flat’ setting where
all the speakers are set individually so no special weighting is given to any one channel.
sets all speakers in accordance with the front speaker settings (no equalization is applied to the front left and right channels).
THX Speaker (only available when the Custom Menu
above is
are using THX speakers (set all speakers to otherwise leave it set to
Stand.Wave Multi-Point (only available when the
Custom Menu above is
ALL or Speaker Setting) – Select
NO
.
EQ Pro. & S-Wave) – In
addition to measurements at the listening position, you can use two more reference points for which test tones will be analyzed for standing waves. This is useful if you want to get a balanced ‘flat’ calibration
for several seating positions in your listening area. Place the microphone at the reference point indicated on-screen and note
the last microphone
placement will be at your main listening position:
5
:
dB
2nd reference
point
12
Main listening
3
position
3rd reference
point
When you’re finished settings the options, press
RETURN
to go back to the Auto MCACC main setup.
EQ
(default)
FRONT ALIGN8
YES
if you
SMALL
),
9
38
En
Note
1 Except in cases where you are only adjusting one parameter (i.e. channel level) from the 2 If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through
on page 40 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 3.
setting
3 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can rename it later in 4 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to
FRONT ALIGN
5 Select the speakers are connected to this receiver, the test tone is output repeatedly. Press 6• The EQ Pro. & S-Wave measurement is also taken when ALL is selected. See Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 43 for more on this.
• Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the respective MCACC preset. For details, see
Setting the Audio options on page 68.
• The FULL BAND PHASE CTRL measurement is also taken when ALL is selected. See Full Band Phase Control on page 45.
7 The Keep SP SYSTEM option allows you to calibrate your system while leaving your current speaker setting (page 48) unchanged. 8 If you selected ALL as your Custom Menu, you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the ALL CH ADJUST and FRONT ALIGN settings. 9 Switch the Multi-Point setting OFF if you only use one listening position.
DEMO
).
Data Management
, and then press
on page 46).
ENTER
to activate the demo mode of Auto MCACC. In the demo mode, no settings are saved and no errors occur. When
SYMMETRY
. Select
CUSTOM
CUSTOM
setup screen (step 2).
to save other correction curves (such as
RETURN
to cancel the test tone.
Surround back speaker
ALL CH ADJUST
and
Page 39
The System Setup menu
07
3 Connect the microphone to the
MCACC SETUP MIC
jack on the front panel.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.
PARAMETER
PHONES
AUDIO VIDEO
(TUNE)
(ST) (ST)
ENTER
(TUNE)
SETUP
RETURN
TUNER EDITSPEAKERS BAND
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
MULTI – ZONE &
SIGNAL
SOURCE/REC SEL
SELECT
CONTROL ON/OFF
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO L RAUDIO
PROCESSING
STEREO/
SB ch
F.S.SURR
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. Otherwise, place the microphone at ear level using a table or a chair.
4 Follow the instructions on-screen.
• Make sure the microphone is connected.
• If you’re using a subwoofer, it is automatically detected every time you switch on the system. Make sure it is on and the volume is turned up.
• See
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup
on page 9 for notes regarding high background noise levels and other possible interference.
5 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish outputting test tones.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while it’s doing this.
• Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.
• With error messages (such as
noise!
or
Check Microphone
checking for ambient noise (see
using the Auto MCACC Setup
Too much ambient
) select
RETRY
after
Problems when
on page 9) and verifying the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply select
GO NEXT
and
continue.
6 If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in the OSD.
1
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the actual speakers you have.
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed, the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this case, you don’t need to select ‘
OK
’ and press
step 7.
0.0
:Cancel
dB
DVD/LD
1. Auto MCACC
CHECK Front [ YES ] Center [ YES ] Surr [ YES ] SB [ YESx2 ] SW [ YES ]
OK
10:Next
ERR
) in the right side
0.0
:Cancel
DVD/LD
1. Auto MCACC
Now Analyzing… ( 2/11)
Environment Check Ambient Noise [ OK ] Microphone [ ] Speaker YES/NO [ ]
If you see an error message ( column (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a problem with the speaker connection. If selecting
RETRY
doesn’t work, turn off the power and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use to select the speaker and
/
to change the setting
(and number for surround back) and continue.
7 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press
ENTER
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs more test tones to determine the optimum receiver settings for channel level, speaker distance, and Acoustic Calibration EQ.
DVD/LD
1. Auto MCACC
Now Analyzing
Subwoofer Check
0.0
:Cancel
DVD/LD
dB
1. Auto MCACC
Now Analyzing… ( 6/11)
Surround Analysis Speaker System [ OK ] Channel Level [ OK ] Speaker Distance [ ]
-
55.0
:Cancel
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.
• If you selected a
Stand.Wave Multi-Point
step 2), you will be asked to place the mic at the 2nd and 3rd reference points before finally placing it at your main listening position.
8 The Auto MCACC Setup has finished! Press to go back to the System Setup menu.
-
55.0
DVD/LD
5a. MCACC Data Check
1. Speaker Setting
2. Channel Level
3. Speaker Distance
4. Standing Wave
5. Acoustic Cal EQ
6. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
ENTER:Next
dB
:Return
ENTER
in
dB
/
.
dB
setup (in
RETURN
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using the
System Setup menu (starting on page 37).
Note
1 This screen is only shown if you selected 2• Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and
room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.
ALL
or
Speaker Setting
Manual speaker setup
in
Custom Menu
on page 48.
from the Auto MCACC
CUSTOM
menu.
2
39
En
Page 40
07
The System Setup menu
You can also choose to view the settings by selecting individual parameters from the
MCACC Data Check
screen:
Speaker Setting
– The size and number of speakers
you’ve connected (see page 48 for more on this)
Channel Level
– The overall balance of your speaker
system (see page 41 or 49 for more on this)
Speaker Distance
– The distance of your speakers
from the listening position (see page 42 or 49 for more on this)
Standing Wave
1
– Filter settings to control lower
‘boomy’ frequencies (see page 42 for more on this)
Acoustic Cal EQ
– Adjustments to the frequency balance of your speaker system based on the acoustic characteristics of your room (see page 43 for more on this)
FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
– The original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the targeted characteristics can be displayed graphically (see
Full Band Phase Control
on
page 45 for more on this).
Press
ENTER
screen. When you’re finished, select
after you have finished checking each
RETURN
to go back
to the System Setup menu. Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver
upon completion of the Auto MCACC setup.
Speaker B
– Select to use the (surround back) B speaker terminals to listen to stereo playback in another room (see
Front Bi-Amp
• amping your front speakers (see
speakers
ZONE 2
on page 55).
– Select to use the (surround back) B
Speaker B setup
on page 54).
– Select this setting if you’re bi-
Bi-amping your front
speaker terminals for an independent system in another zone (see
3 When you’re finished, press
MULTI-ZONE listening
RETURN
.
on page 56).
You will return to the System Setup menu.
Manual MCACC setup
You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup menu to make detailed adjustments when you’re more familiar with the system. Before making these settings, you should have already completed
up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control)
on page 8. You only need to make these settings once (unless you
change the placement of your current speaker system or add new speakers).
Caution
• The test tones used in the System Setup are output at high volume.
Automatically setting
40
En
Surround back speaker setting
• Default setting:
There are several ways you can use the surround back speaker channels with this system. In addition to a normal home theater setup where they are used for the surround back speakers, they can be used for bi-amping the front speakers or as an independent speaker system in another room.
1 Select ‘Surr Back System’ from the System Setup menu.
See
Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
above if you’re not already at this screen.
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
Normal (default)
-
55.0
dB
DVD/LD
2. Surr Back System Normal (default)
Front :Normal Center :Normal Surr :Normal SB :Normal
:Exit
--.-
:Finish
dB
Important
• You will need to first specify the MCACC preset you want to adjust by pressing
SETUP
(step 2 in
Making receiver settings from the
System Setup menu
MCACC is selected while
MCACC
before pressing
on page 37). When Manual
MCACC
is set to
OFF
, the selection screen for the MCACC memory appears. Select a memory to adjust manually.
DVD/LD
3. Manual MCACC
Select MCACC memory.
MCACC OFF
M1. MEMORY 1
ENTER:Next
-
55.0
:Cancel
dB
2 Select the surround back speaker setting.
Normal (default)
– Select for normal home theater use with surround back speakers in your main (speaker system A) setup.
Note
1 Since the distance measurements have been set according to the sound characteristics of your speakers, there are cases where (for optimal surround sound) the actual distance may differ from the speaker distance setting.
Page 41
The System Setup menu
07
• For some of the settings below, you’ll have to connect the setup microphone to the front panel and place it about ear level at your normal listening position. Press
SETUP
to display the System Setup menu before you connect the microphone to this receiver. If the microphone is connected while the System Setup menu is not being displayed, the display will change to the Auto MCACC setup menu. See
using the Auto MCACC Setup
Problems when
on page 9 for notes regarding high background noise levels and other possible interference.
• If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and turn up the volume to the middle position.
1 Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the System Setup menu.
See
Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
on page 37 if you’re not already at this screen.
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
-
55.0
:Exit
DVD/LD
dB
3. Manual MCACC
a. Fine Channel Level
b. Fine SP Distance c. Standing Wave d. EQ Adjust e. EQ Professional
-
55.0
:Return
dB
2 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you’re doing this for the first time, you might want to make these settings in order.
Fine Ch Level
balance of your speaker system (see
Level
below).
Fine SP Distance
your speaker system (see
– Make fine adjustments to the overall
Fine Channel
– Make precise delay settings for
Fine Speaker Distance
on
page 42).
Standing Wave
frequencies in your listening room (see
Wave
on page 42).
– Control overly resonant low
Standing
The last two settings are specifically for customizing the parameters explained in
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust
on page 43:
EQ Adjust
– Manually adjust the frequency balance of your speaker system while listening to test tones (see
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust
EQ Professional
– Calibrate your system based on
on page 43).
the direct sound coming from the speakers and make detailed settings according to your room’s reverb characteristics (see
Professional
on page 43).
Acoustic Calibration EQ
Fine Channel Level
• Default setting:
You can achieve better surround sound by properly adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system. The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the
speaker setup
1 Select ‘Fine Ch Level’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.
The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference level.
DVD/LD
3. Manual MCACC
a. Fine Channel Level
b. Fine SP Distance c. Standing Wave d. EQ Adjust e. EQ Professional
2 Adjust the level of the left channel.
This will be the reference speaker level, so you may want to keep the level around of room to adjust the other speaker levels.
• After pressing
3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels (
+/–10dB
Use
) as necessary.
/
to adjust the volume of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker. When it sounds like both tones are the same volume, press and continue to the next channel.
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will change depending on which speaker you select.
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply use
/
4 When you’re finished, press
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
0.0dB
on page 48.
-
:Return
DVD/LD
3a. Fine Channel Level
MCACC : M1. MEMORY 1
Ref.Ch : L +0.5dB
ENTER:Next :Cancel
ENTER
DVD/LD
3a. Fine Channel Level
R L
L +0.5dB R -1.5dB C [ +1.0dB ] SL [ -9.5dB ] SR [ +10.0dB ]
to select it.
(all channels)
55.0
dB
DVD/LD
3a. Fine Channel Level
Please wait... 20
CAUTION
Loud test tones will be output.
0.0dB
so that you’ll have plenty
0.0
-
:Cancel
dB
, test tones will be output.
0.0
dB
SBL[ -9.5dB ]
SBR[+10.0dB ] SW [ -1.5dB ]
:Finish
RETURN
.
Manual
20.0
dB
to confirm
41
En
Page 42
07
The System Setup menu
Fine Speaker Distance
• Default setting:
For proper sound depth and separation with your system, it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the
Manual speaker setup
1 Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.
DVD/LD
3. Manual MCACC
a. Fine Channel Level
b. Fine SP Distance
c. Standing Wave d. EQ Adjust e. EQ Professional
2 Adjust the distance of the left channel from the listening position.
3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance as necessary.
Use
/
to adjust the delay of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker. The delay is measured in terms of speaker distance from
DVD/LD
3b. Fine SP Distance
SL L L R [2.81 m] C 1.92 m] SL [2.23 m] SR
:Finish
Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the target channel. From the listening position, face the two speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each speaker. Try to make the two tones sound as if they are arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of
you and between your arm span.
When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up, press
to confirm and continue to the next channel.
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will change depending on which speaker you select.
3.05 m
[2.34 m]
3.00 m
-
55.0
:Return
0.0
(all speakers)
below.
dB
DVD/LD
3b. Fine SP Distance
MCACC : M1. MEMORY 1
Ref.Ch : L
3.00 m
ENTER:Next :Cancel
0.01
dB
DVD/LD
3b. Fine SP Distance
SBL SL
SBL 1.92 m SBR [1.83 m] SW
[2.34 m]
:Finish
1
to
9.00
0.0
dB
meters.
0.0
dB
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply use
/
to select it.
4 When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Standing Wave
• Default setting:
Acoustic standing waves occur when, under certain conditions, sound waves from your speaker system resonate mutually with sound waves reflected off the walls in your listening area. This can have a negative effect on the overall sound, especially at certain lower frequencies. Depending on speaker placement, your listening position, and ultimately the shape of your room, it results in an overly resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The Standing Wave Control uses filters to reduce the effect of overly resonant sounds in your listening area. During playback of a source, you can customize the filters used for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC
3
presets.
1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.
DVD/LD
3. Manual MCACC
a. Fine Channel Level b. Fine SP Distance
c. Standing Wave
d. EQ Adjust e. EQ Professional
2 Select ‘ON’ (if it is not already selected) then adjust the parameters for the Standing Wave Control.
Filter Ch
– Select the channel to which you will apply the filter(s): subwoofer),
TRIM (only available when the filter channel above is
SW) – Adjust the subwoofer channel level (to
compensate for the difference in output post-filter).
f
/ Q /
ATT
– These are the filter parameters where f represents the frequency you will be targeting and is the bandwidth (the higher the Q, the narrower the bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation ( amount of reduction to the targeted frequency).
3 When you’re finished, press
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
2
ON
DVD/LD
-
55.0
dB
3c. Standing Wave
MCACC : M1. MEMORY 1
Filter Ch SW TRIM [ +12.0
No. 1 2 3 f [ 63
Hz
] [ 110
Q [ 3.0
] [ 8.0 ] [ 5.0 ]
ATT
[ 2.5
dB
:Return
Main
(all except center channel and
Center
or
SW
] [ 6.0
(subwoofer).
RETURN
Hz
dB
-
dB
] [ 250
] [ 6.0
:Finish
.
55.0
]
ATT
dB
Hz
]
dB
]
Q
, the
42
En
Note
1• If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your speakers very slightly.
• For better audibility, the subwoofer emits a continuous test tone (oscillating pulses are heard from your other speakers). Note that it may be difficult to compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup (depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker). 2 You can switch on or off the Standing Wave feature in the Audio Parameter menu. See 3• Since they will be overwritten, you may want to save the standing wave settings made with the Auto MCACC Setup to another MCACC preset.
• Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection.
• When selected.
Standing Wave
is selected for a MCACC preset memory where
S-WAVE
Setting the Audio options
is set to
OFF
in the Audio parameter,
on page 68 for more on this.
S-WAVE ON
is automatically
Page 43
The System Setup menu
07
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust
Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room equalizer for your speakers (excluding the subwoofer). It works by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics that can color the original source material (providing a ‘flat’ equalization setting). If you’re not satisfied with the adjustment provided in
surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control)
page 8 or
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
also adjust these settings manually to get a frequency balance that suits your tastes.
1 Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.
2 Confirm that the MCACC preset shown in the display is the one you want to adjust, then select START.
3 Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to your liking.
Use the Use the
/
buttons to select the channel.
/
buttons to select the frequency and to boost or cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go back to the top of the screen and use the the next channel.
• The
OVER!
indicator shows in the display if the frequency adjustment is too drastic and might distort. If this happens, bring the level down until
OVER!
disappears from the display.
Automatically setting up for
on page 37, you can
1
DVD/LD
3. Manual MCACC
a. Fine Channel Level b. Fine SP Distance c. Standing Wave
d. EQ Adjust
e. EQ Professional
DVD/LD
3d. EQ Adjust
MCACC:M1. MEMORY 1
[ START ]
ENTER:Next :Cancel
DVD/LD
3d. EQ Adjust
63Hz [ 0.0]
MCACC : M1
125Hz [ 0.0]
Ch [SBL]
250Hz [ 0.0]
dB
500Hz [ 0.0] 1kHz 0.0 2kHz [ -1.0] 4kHz [
1k2k4k
63
125
250
500
8kHz [ -4.5] 16kHz [ -7.0] :Finish
8k
16k
TRM
TRIM [
-
55.0
dB
:Return
-
55.0
dB
-
55.0
dB
-2.0]
0.0]
/
buttons to select
on
/
Tip
• Changing the frequency curve of one channel too drastically will affect the overall balance. If the speaker balance seems uneven, you can raise or lower channel levels using test tones with the feature. Use
/
to select
TRIM
then use
TRIM
/
to raise or lower the channel level for the current speaker.
4 When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system based on the direct sound coming from the speakers. It can also provide you with a graphical output of the
frequency response of your room.
How to use Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
If you find that lower frequencies seem overly reverberant in your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’), or that different channels seem to exhibit different reverb characteristics, select
Custom Menu
EQ Pro. & S-Wave
setting in page 37 to calibrate the room automatically. This should provide a balanced calibration that suits the characteristics of your listening room.
If you still aren't satisfied with the results, the manual Advanced EQ setup (below) provides a more customized calibration of your system using the direct sound of the speakers. This is done with the help of a graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or using a computer (with software available from Pioneer — see
a PC for Advanced MCACC output
How to interpret the graphical output
The graph shows decibels on the vertical axis and time (in milliseconds) on the horizontal axis. A straight line indicates a flat-response room (no reverb), whereas a sloping line indicates the presence of reverberation when outputting test tones. The sloping line will eventually flatten out when the reverberant sound stabilizes (this usually takes about 100 ms or so).
2
(or
ALL
) for the
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
Connecting
on page 61).
on
Note
1 When
EQ Adjust
2 This system allows you to customize your system calibration with the help of a graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or using a computer (with software available from Pioneer—see
is selected for a MCACC preset memory where EQ is set to
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output
OFF
in the Audio parameter, EQ ON is automatically selected.
on page 61 for more on this).
43
En
Page 44
07
The System Setup menu
By analyzing the graph, you should be able to see how your room is responding to certain frequencies. Differences in channel level and speaker distance are taken into account automatically (compensation is provided for comparison purposes), and the frequency measurements can be examined both with and without
the equalization performed by this receiver.
1
Setting Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional according to your room characteristics
Using the manual setup, you can set the time period at which the frequency response is analyzed, pinpointing the time that is best for system calibration with your particular room characteristics.
The graph below shows the difference between conventional acoustic calibration and professional calibration (the gray circle indicates the point where the microphone captures sound during frequency analysis).
Level
Test tone
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro. calibration range
0 16080
Conventional Acoustic Cal. EQ calibration range
Time (in msec.)
As soon as audio is output from your speaker system, it is influenced by room characteristics, such as walls, furniture, and the dimensions of the room. The sooner the frequency analysis, the less it is influenced by the room. We recommend an earlier time setting of
30~50ms
to compensate for two major factors that will
influence the sound of most rooms:
Reverberance of high vs. low frequencies
– Depending on your room, you may find that lower frequencies seem overly reverberant compared to higher frequencies (i.e. your room sounds ‘boomy’). This may result in a skewed frequency analysis if the measurement is done too late.
Level
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro. calibration range
0 16080
Conventional Acoustic Cal. EQ calibration range
Low frequencies
High frequencies
Time (in msec.)
Reverb characteristics for different channels
– Reverb characteristics can be somewhat different for each channel. Since this difference increases as the sound is influenced by the various room characteristics, it is often better to capture a frequency analysis early on for smoother mixing of channel frequencies/sounds.
Level
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro. calibration range
0 16080
Conventional Acoustic Cal. EQ calibration range
Left surround
Right Surround
Time (in msec.)
If your room isn’t affected by the factors above, it is often not necessary to make a
30~50ms
setting. Later time settings may provide a more detailed sound experience with your speaker system. It is best to try and see what works best for your particular room.
Note that changing the room (for example, moving furniture or paintings) will affect the calibration results. In such cases, you should recalibrate your system.
Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
1 Select ‘EQ Professional’ then press ENTER.
-
55.0
:Return
dB
DVD/LD
3e. EQ Professional
1. Reverb Measurement
2. Reverb View
3. Advanced EQ Setup
e.EQ Professional
ENTER:Next
-
55.0
:Return
dB
DVD/LD
3. Manual MCACC
a. Fine Channel Level b. Fine SP Distance c. Standing Wave d. EQ Adjust
e. EQ Professional
2 Select an option and press ENTER.
Reverb Measurement
– Use this to measure the reverb characteristics of your room (for graphical output using a PC, see
MCACC output
Connecting a PC for Advanced
on page 61 to connect an RS-232C
cable before selecting this option).
Reverb View
– You can check the reverb measurements made for specified frequency ranges in each channel.
Advanced EQ Setup
– Use this to select the time period that will be used for frequency adjustment and calibration, based on the reverb measurement of your listening area. Note that customizing system calibration using this setup will alter the settings you made in
(MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) Automatic MCACC (Expert)
Automatically setting up for surround sound
on page 8 or
on page 37 and is not
necessary if you’re satisfied with these settings.
44
En
Note
1 Note that due to an effect known as ‘group delay’, lower frequencies will take longer to be generated than higher frequencies (this is most obvious when comparing the frequencies at 0 ms). This initial slope is not a problem (i.e. excessive reverb) with your listening room.
Page 45
The System Setup menu
07
3 If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’, select EQ ON or OFF and then START.
DVD/LD
3e1. Reverb Measurement
MCACC : M1. MEMORY 1
Reverb Measure with EQ OFF
[ Start ]
-
:Cancel
DVD/LD
55.0
dB
3e1. Reverb Measurement
Now Analyzing… ( 2/ 5)
Environment Check Ambient Noise [ OK] Microphone [ ] Speaker Level [ ]
0.0
:Cancel
dB
The following options determine how the reverb characteristics of your listening area are displayed in
Reverb View
EQ OFF
• your listening area
and
Output PC (Data Management
):
– You will see the reverb characteristics of
without
the equalization
performed by this receiver (before calibration).
EQ ON
– You will see the reverb characteristics of
your listening area by this receiver (after calibration).
with
the equalization performed
1
Note that the EQ response may not appear entirely flat due to adjustments necessary for your listening area.
When the reverb measurement is finished, you can select
Reverb View
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output
to see the results on-screen. See
on page 83
for troubleshooting information.
4 If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can check the reverb characteristics for each channel. Press RETURN when you’re done.
DVD/LD
Reverb View
3e2.
M1 : EQ OFF Ch L Fq [ 125Hz ]
dB
080160ms
-
55.0
:Return
dB
This appears according to the setting you chose in
Reverb Measurement
(step 3 above). Use the
/
buttons to select the channel and the frequency you want to check. Use the
/
buttons to go back and forth between the two. Note that the markers on the vertical axis indicate decibels in 2 dB steps.
5 If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected, enter the desired time setting for calibration. Press
to
proceed to the next screen, and then select START.
Based on the reverb measurement above, you can choose the time period that will be used for the final frequency adjustment and calibration. Even though you can make this setting without reverb measurement, it is
best to use the measurement results as a reference for your time setting. For an optimal system calibration based on the direct sound coming from the speakers, we recommend using the
DVD/LD
3e3. Adv. EQ Setup (1/2)
Ch L Fq [ 125H z] Tm [30
dB
080160ms
/
Use the
buttons to select the channel, frequency,
and time setting. Use the
30~50ms
-
55.0
dB
-
50ms]
:Cancel
/
setting.
DVD/LD
3e3. Adv. EQ Setup (2/2)
MCACC :M1.MEMORY 1 EQ Type SYMMETRY Stand.Wave Multi-Point [ NO ]
[ START ]
-
55.0
: Cancel
buttons to switch
dB
between them. You can switch between your connected speakers
(excluding the subwoofer), and display the measurements for the following frequencies:
125Hz, 250Hz, 500Hz, 1kHz, 2kHz, 4kHz, 8kHz 16kHz
.
63Hz
,
and
Select the setting from the following time periods (in milliseconds):
40~60ms, 50~70ms
0~20ms, 10~30ms, 20~40ms, 30~50ms
and
60~80ms
. This setting will be
applied to all channels during calibration. When you’re finished, select
START
. It will take about 2
to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish. After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set, you are
given the option to check the settings on-screen.
Full Band Phase Control
The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers connected and corrects the phase distortion. This receiver analyzes the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers by calibrating test signals output from the speakers with the supplied microphone, therefore flattening the analyzed frequency-phase characteristics during audio signal playback. This correction minimizes group delay between the middle- and low-frequency ranges and improves the frequency-phase characteristics across all ranges. Furthermore, the enhanced frequency-phase characteristics between channels ensure better surround sound integration for multichannel sources. For details, see
Phase Control
on page 11.
This section describes how to calibrate the frequency­phase characteristics of the speakers only. Once you have performed calibration with Auto MCACC set as a default setting or with
CUSTOM
Phase Control calibration is already done (In this case, the previous settings are overwritten if you perform calibration again as described here).
set to
ALL
Using Full Band
, the Full Band
,
Note
1 The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when System Setup menu and
press
MCACC
to select it before pressing
SETUP
.
EQ ON
is selected. To use another MCACC preset, exit the
45
En
Page 46
07
The System Setup menu
1 Select ‘
FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
’ from the System
Setup menu.
See
Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
above if you’re not already at this screen.
-
55.0
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
2 Select an option and press
Measurement
dB
DVD/LD
4. FULL BAND PASE CTRL
ENTER:Next
:Exit
a. Measurement
b. Group Delay View
ENTER
-
55.0
dB
:Return
.
– Calibrates and corrects the
frequency-phase characteristics of each speaker.
Group Delay View
– The original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the targeted characteristics can be displayed graphically.
3 If you selected ‘
DVD/LD
4a. Measurement
FULL BAND PHASE CTRL Measurement
[ START ]
ENTER:Start
Measurement
-
55.0
dB
DVD/LD
4a. Measurement
Now Analyzing… ( 5/ 5)
FULL BAND PHASE CTRL Delay Check [ OK] Group Delay [ ]
ENTER:Start
:Cancel
’, press
ENTER
0.0
:Cancel
.
dB
When the Full Band Phase Control measurement is finished, you can select
Group Delay View
to see the
results on-screen.
4 If you selected ‘
Group Delay View
’, you can check
the graph showing the group delay characteristics.
dB
Tgt
Targeted characteristics
^
after correction
^ ^
Org
Original characteristics
Hz
of the speakers calibrated
1
Press
RETURN
DVD/LD
4b. Group Delay View
ms
then you’re done.
-
Original & Target Channel Front
55.0
:Return
This appears according to the setting you chose in
Measurement
channel you want to check.
(Step 2 above). Use
2
/
to select the
Data Management
This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets, allowing you to calibrate your system for different listening positions (or frequency adjustments for the
same listening position).
3
This is useful for alternate settings to match the kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).
From this menu you can check your current settings, copy from one preset to another, name presets for easier identification and clear any ones you don’t need.
1 Select ‘Data Management’ from the System Setup menu.
See
Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
above if you’re not already at this screen.
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
-
55.0
:Exit
dB
DVD/LD
5. Data Management
a. MCACC Data Check
b. Memory Rename c. MCACC Memory Copy d. MCACC Memory Clear e. Output PC
-
55.0
:Return
dB
2 Select the setting you want to adjust.
MCACC Data Check
– Check the settings for any of your MCACC presets using the on-screen display (see
Checking MCACC preset data
Memory Rename
• easy identification (see
– Name your MCACC presets for
Renaming MCACC presets
below).
below).
MCACC Memory Copy
MCACC preset to another (see
preset data
MCACC Memory Clear
below).
that you don’t want (see
– Copy settings from one
Copying MCACC
– Clear any MCACC presets
Clearing MCACC presets
below).
Output PC
MCACC output
– See
Connecting a PC for Advanced
on page 61 for more on this.
Checking MCACC preset data
After you have completed
Automatically setting up for
surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control)
page 8 or
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
on page 37, you can check your calibrated settings using the on-screen display.
on
46
En
Note
1 When your PC is connected to this receiver, the original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the corrected characteristics of group delay can be displayed in 3-dimension on your PC. 2 The subwoofer is excluded from correction.The super tweeter in the super high-frequency range is excluded from correction. Also, speakers theoretically unaffected by group delay (full-range speakers, for instance) are excluded from correction. Because calibration involves the spatial characteristics, you may not get the same results after you perform calibration again depending on your audiovisual environment and your speaker system. 3 This can be done in either of which you should have already completed.
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control)
on page 8 or
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
on page 37,
Page 47
The System Setup menu
07
1 Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the Data Management setup menu.
DVD/LD
5. Data Management
a. MCACC Data Check
b. Memory Rename c. MCACC Memory Copy d. MCACC Memory Clear e. Output PC
:Return
dB
DVD/LD
5a. MCACC Data Check
1. Speaker Setting
2. Channel Level
3. Speaker Distance
4. Standing Wave
5. Acoustic Cal EQ
6. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
ENTER:Next
-
55.0
:Return
dB
-
55.0
2 Select the setting you want to check.
• It is useful to do this while a source is playing so you can compare the different settings.
3 Select the MCACC preset that you want to check.
Use the
/
buttons if necessary to switch speakers/
settings.
4 Press
RETURN
DVD/LD
5a5. EQ Data Check
MCACC M1 63Hz : +0.5 Ch [SBL] 125Hz : -5.5 dB 500Hz : 0.0 1kHz : +12.0 2kHz : +5.5 4kHz : -3.0
1k2k4k
63
125
250
500
8kHz : 0.0 16kHz : +7.0 :Return TRIM : -2.5
to go back to the Data Check menu,
250Hz : +3.0
8k
16k
TRIM
-
55.0
dB
repeating steps 2 and 3 to check other settings.
5 When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.
Renaming MCACC presets
If you have several different MCACC presets that you’re using, you may want to rename them for easier identification.
1 Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the Data Management setup menu.
-
55.0
DVD/LD
5. Data Management
a. MCACC Data Check
b. Memory Rename
c. MCACC Memory Copy d. MCACC Memory Clear e. Output PC
-
55.0
:Return
DVD/LD
dB
5b. Memory Rename
MCACC Position Rename
M1 MEMORY 1 M2 [ MEMORY 2 ] M3 [ MEMORY 3 ] M4 [ MEMORY 4 ] M5 [ MEMORY 5 ] M6 [ MEMORY 6 ]
dB
:Finish
2 Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then select an appropriate preset name.
Use
/
to select the preset, then
/
to select a
preset name.
3 Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary, then press
RETURN
when you’re finished.
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.
Copying MCACC preset data
If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see
copying your current settings
Manual MCACC setup
above), we recommend
1
to an unused MCACC preset. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this will give you a reference point from which to start.
1 Select ‘
MCACC Memory Copy
’ from the Data
Management setup menu.
DVD/LD
5. Data Management
a. MCACC Data Check b. Memory Rename
c. MCACC Memory Copy
d. MCACC Memory Clear e. Output PC
-
55.0
:Return
dB
DVD/LD
5c. MCACC Memory Copy
Copy
All Data
From
[ M1. MEMORY 1 ]
To
[ M2. MEMORY 2 ]
Start Copy [Cancel ]
:Cancel
-
55.0
dB
2 Select the setting you want to copy.
All Data
– Copies all the settings of the selected
MCACC preset memory.
LEVEL & DISTANCE
– Copies only the channel level and speaker distance settings of the selected MCACC preset memory.
3 Select the MCACC preset you’ll be copying the settings ‘From’ then specify where you want to copy them (‘To’).
Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC preset you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).
4 Select ‘Copy’ to confirm and copy the settings.
Completed
shows in the OSD to confirm the MCACC preset has been copied, then you automatically return to the Data Management setup menu.
Clearing MCACC presets
If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets stored in memory, you can choose to clear the calibration settings of that preset.
1 Select ‘
MCACC Memory Clear
’ from the Data
Management setup menu.
DVD/LD
5. Data Management
a. MCACC Data Check
b. Memory Rename c. MCACC Memory Copy
d. MCACC Memory Clear
e. Output PC
-
55.0
:Return
dB
DVD/LD
5d. MCACC Memory Clear
Clear M1. MEMORY 1
Start clear [Cancel]
-
55.0
:Cancel
dB
2 Select the MCACC preset you want to clear.
Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).
3 Select ‘Clear’ to confirm and clear the preset.
Completed
shows in the OSD to confirm the MCACC preset has been cleared, then you automatically return to the Data Management setup menu.
Note
1 The settings made in
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control)
on page 8 or
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
on page 37.
47
En
Page 48
07
The System Setup menu
Manual speaker setup
This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to optimize the surround sound performance. You only need to make these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new speakers).
These settings are designed to customize your system, but if you’re satisfied with the settings made in
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control)
make all of these settings.
Caution
• The test tones used in the System Setup are output at high volume.
1 Select ‘Manual SP Setup’ then press
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
2 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:
Speaker Setting
speakers you’ve connected (see below).
Channel Level
speaker system (page 49).
Speaker Distance
speakers from the listening position (page 49).
X-Curve
– Adjust the tonal balance of your speaker
system for movie soundtracks (page 50).
THX Audio Setting
a THX speaker setup (page 50).
3 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting, pressing
RETURN
on page 8, it isn’t necessary to
ENTER
.
-
55.0
:Exit
DVD/LD
dB
6. Manual SP Setup
a. Speaker Setting
b. Channel Level c. Speaker Distance d. X-Curve e. THX Audio Setting
-
55.0
:Return
dB
– Specify the size and number of
– Adjust the overall balance of your
– Specify the distance of your
– Specify whether you are using
to confirm after each screen.
Speaker Setting
Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration (size, number of speakers and crossover frequency). It is a good idea to make sure that the settings made in
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control)
this setting applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be set independently.
1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
DVD/LD
6. Manual SP Setup
a. Speaker Setting
b. Channel Level c. Speaker Distance d. X-Curve e. THX Audio Setting
2 Choose the set of speakers that you want to set then select a speaker size.
Use
/
to select the size (and number) of each of the
following speakers:
Front
– Select reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or if you didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select the bass frequencies to the subwoofer.
Center
– Select
reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select
SMALL
to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center speaker, choose the front speakers).
Surround
– Select
reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select
SMALL
to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround speakers choose surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a subwoofer).
Surr Back
– Select the number of surround back
speakers you have (one, two or none). if your surround back speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround back speakers choose
on page 8 are correct.1 Note that
-
55.0
dB
DVD/LD
6a. Speaker Setting
Front SMALL Center [ SMALL ] Surr [ SMALL ] SB [ SW [ YES ]
X. OVER [ 80Hz ]
:Return
2
LARGE
(THX:ALL SMALL )
if your front speakers
SMALL x2
-
]
:Return
55.0
SMALL
LARGE
if your center speaker
NO
(the center channel is sent to
LARGE
if your surround speakers
NO
(the sound of the
3
Select
SMALL
to send bass
dB
to send
LARGE
NO
.
48
En
Note
1 If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all speakers to 2 If you select if the front speakers are set to 3• If you selected
• If the surround speakers are set to
• If you select one surround back speaker only, make sure that speaker is hooked up to the left surround back terminal.
SMALL
for the front speakers the subwoofer will automatically be fixed to
SMALL
Speaker B
. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.
or
Front Bi-Amp
NO
, the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO.
SMALL
.
(in
Surround back speaker setting
YES
. Also, the center and surround speakers can’t be set to
on page 40) you can’t adjust the surround back settings.
LARGE
Page 49
The System Setup menu
07
Subwoofer
channels set to subwoofer when
– LFE signals and bass frequencies of
SMALL
are output from the
YES
is selected. Choose the
PLUS
setting if you want the subwoofer to output bass sound continuously or you want deeper bass (the bass frequencies that would normally come out the front and center speakers are also routed to the
subwoofer). choose
1
If you did not connect a subwoofer
NO
(the bass frequencies are output from
other speakers).
3 Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover frequency.
2
Frequencies below this point will be sent to the subwoofer (or
4 When you’re finished, press
LARGE
speakers).
RETURN
.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Channel Level
Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the overall balance of your speaker system, an important factor when setting up a home theater system.
Important
• When Channel Level is selected while to
OFF
, the selection screen for the MCACC memory
appears. Select a memory to adjust manually.
DVD/LD
6b. Channel Level
Select MCACC memory.
MCACC OFF
M1.MEMORY 1
ENTER:Next :Cancel
-
55.0
1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
DVD/LD
6. Manual SP Setup
a. Speaker Setting
b. Channel Level
c. Speaker Distance d. X-Curve e. THX Audio Setting
-
55.0
:Return
dB
DVD/LD
6b. Channel Level
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1 Test Tone AUTO
CAUTION
ENTER:Next :Return
MCACC
dB
is set
-
55.0
dB
AUTO
– Adjust channel levels as the test tone moves
from speaker to speaker automatically.
3 Confirm your selected setup option.
The test tones will start after you press
DVD/LD
6b. Channel Level
Please Wait . . . 20
Loud test tones will be output.
4 Adjust the level of each channel using the
-
20.0
:Return
dB
ENTER
.
/
buttons.
If you selected The
AUTO
MANUAL
, use
/
to switch speakers.
setup will output test tones in the order shown
on-screen:
DVD/LD
6b. Channel Level
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
L 0.0dB SR [ 0.0dB] C [ 0.0dB] SBR [ 0.0dB] R [ 0.0dB] SBL [ 0.0dB] SL [ 0.0dB] SW [ 0.0dB]
0.0
:Finish
dB
Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is emitted.
5 When you’re finished, press
3
RETURN
.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Tip
• The channel level can be changed at any time. Press
RECEIVER
control, and then use
then press
CH LEVEL
/
on the remote
to adjust the level.
Speaker Distance
For good sound depth and separation from your system, you need to specify the distance of your speakers from the listening position. The receiver can then add the proper delay needed for effective surround sound.
2 Select a setup option.
MANUAL
– Move the test tone manually from speaker to speaker and adjust individual channel levels.
Note
1 If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in the amount of bass due low frequency cancellations. In this case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good results, listen to the bass response with it set to
PLUS
and
YES
the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting 2• This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as back from those selected as
• If you’re using a THX speaker setup, confirm that the crossover frequency is set to 3• If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take the readings from your main listening position and adjust the level of each speaker to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).
• The subwoofer test tone is output at low volumes. You may need to adjust the level after testing with an actual soundtrack.
or the front speakers set to
SMALL
. It also decides where the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel.
LARGE
and
SMALL
LARGE
for your front speakers and
alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best. If you’re having problems,
SMALL
for the front speakers.
80Hz
LARGE
.
PLUS
for the subwoofer. This may not,
, or the subwoofer, and bass sounds playing
49
En
Page 50
07
The System Setup menu
Important
• When Speaker Distance is selected while set to
OFF
, the selection screen for the MCACC
MCACC
is
memory appears. Select a memory to adjust manually.
DVD/LD
6c. Speaker Distance
Select MCACC memory.
MCACC OFF
M1.MEMORY 1
ENTER:Next :Cancel
-
55.0
dB
1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
DVD/LD
6. Manual SP Setup
a. Speaker Setting b. Channel Level
c. Speaker Distance
d. X-Curve e. THX Audio Setting
-
55.0
:Return
DVD/LD
dB
6c. Speaker Distance
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
L 0.50 m C [1.50 m ] R [1.00 m ]
2 Adjust the distance of each speaker using the
-
55.0
:Finish
dB
/
buttons.
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 0.01 meters.
3 When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Tip
• For best surround sound, make sure the surround back speakers are the same distance from the listening position.
X-Curve
Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright when played back in large rooms. The X-Curve setting acts as a kind of re-equalization for home theater listening, and restores proper tonal balance of movie
soundtracks.
1 Select ‘X-Curve’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
1
DVD/LD
6. Manual SP Setup
a. Speaker Setting b. Channel Level c. Speaker Distance
d. X-Curve
e. THX Audio Setting
-
55.0
:Return
dB
DVD/LD
6d. X-Curve
X-Curve -2.0dB/oct
63
125
250
500
1k2k4k
-
55.0
8k
16k
:Finish
dB
2 Choose the X-Curve setting you want.
Use
/
to adjust the setting. The X-Curve is expressed as a downwards slope in decibels per octave, starting at 2 kHz. The sound becomes less bright as the slope increases (to a maximum of
-3.0dB/oct
). Use the following guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your room size:
Room size (m2)
X-Curve (dB/oct)
• If you select
≤36≤48≤60≤72≤
–0.5 –1 –1.5 –2 –2.5 –3
OFF
, the frequency curve will be flat and
300≤1000
the X-Curve has no effect.
3 Select ‘Return’ then press ENTER to finish.
THX Audio Setting
For the most effective results when using the THX Select2 Cinema and THX MusicMode listening modes (see
the Home THX modes
Speaker Array (ASA) system (see
on page 30) with the Advanced
About THX
it is required that you make the setting. See
speakers
placement.
on page 20 for more on THX speaker
2
1 Select ‘THX Audio Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
-
55.0
DVD/LD
6. Manual SP Setup
a. Speaker Setting b. Channel Level c. Speaker Distance d. X-Curve
e. THX Audio Setting
dB
:Return
2 Specify the distance of your surround back speakers from each other.
0 – 0.3m
DVD/LD
6e. THX Audio Setting
SB SP Position
– Surround speakers within 30 cm apart
0-0.3m
SBL-SBR
-
55.0
:Finish
dB
(best for THX surround sound).
> 0.3 – 1.2m
– Surround speakers between 30 cm
and 1.2 m apart.
1.2m <
– Surround speakers more than 1.2 m apart.
3 When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Using
on page 87),
Placing the
50
En
Note
1 Since the principal is the same, X-Curve isn’t applied when you’re using any of the Home THX modes (see 2 If you don’t have surround back speakers, or just have one, you won’t be able to select this setting (
Cannot select
Using the Home THX modes
shows in the display).
on page 30).
Page 51
Other connections
A
U
C
k
od
Chapter 8:
Other connections
08
Caution
• Make sure the power is switched off before making or changing the connections.
Connecting an iPod
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from your iPod
using the controls of this receiver.
Connecting your iPod to the receiver
PRE OUT
AUDIO
ANTENNA
M LOOP
ZONE2
E
R
L
D
T
/ 1
R/ R 1
R/ R 2
R L
AUDIO
iPod Music > Extras > Settings >
Shuffle Songs
Backlight
MENU
ontrol Doc
for iP
PHONO
IN
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
SURROUND BACK
1
12 V TRIGGER
(
DC OUT 12V/ TOTAL 50 mA MAX
LR
FRONT
CENTER
SUB W.
SUR- ROUND
SUR- ROUND BACK
(
Single
LR
L
L
FRONT
IN
CENTER
iPod
LR
RS-232C
2
MULTI CH IN
)
1
)
FRONT
A
CENTER SURROUND S
RL RLR
iPod control
cable
1 Set this receiver to the standby mode, and then use the Control Dock for iPod supplied with an iPod control
2
to connect your iPod to the iPod terminal on the
cable rear panel of this receiver.
Push the connector in until you hear it click home. To disconnect, squeeze the connector (as shown) to release the catch, then pull out.
2 Switch the receiver on and press the
source
button to switch the receiver to the iPod.
The front panel display shows
Loading
iPod input
while the receiver
verifies the connection and retrieves data from the iPod.
3 Use the
TOP MENU
button to display iPod Top
menu.
When the display shows music from the iPod.
• If after pressing
Connection
, try switching off the receiver and
Top Menu
3
iPod
the display shows
you’re ready to play
No
reconnecting the iPod to the receiver.
iPod playback
To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take advantage of the OSD of your TV connected to this receiver.
also control all operations for music in the front panel display of this receiver.
Finding what you want to play
When your iPod is connected to this receiver, you can browse songs stored on your iPod by playlist, artist, album name, song name, genre or composer, similar to using your iPod directly.
iPod Top
[ Playlists [ Artists [ Albums [ Songs [ Podcasts [
Genres [ Composers [ Audiobooks [ Shuffle Songs
ENTER
–55dB
] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ]
4
You can
Note
1 This system is compatible with an iPod equipped with a dock connector port, iPod mini, iPod nano and iPod Photo portable device (third generation and above). However, compatibility may vary depending on the software version of your iPod. This receiver does not support software versions prior to iPod updater 2004-10-20 (plesae use the latest iPod software versions later than the iPod updater 2004-10-20).
2• This product is the Pioneer Control Dock for iPod (IDK-90C) for use with an iPod equipped with a dock connector port (third generation and above), iPod mini, iPod nano or iPod Photo.
• For detailed instructions on using the iPod, please refer to the manual supplied with the iPod.
• The connected iPod should be updated with the latest iPod software versions later than the iPod updater 2004-10-20. 3• The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this receiver ( be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the equalizer off before connecting.
• You can’t use the iPod or HOME MEDIA GALLERY ( 4• Note that non-roman characters in the playlist are displayed as
• This feature is not available for photos or video clips on your iPod.
VSX-LX70 only
#
Pioneer
shows in the iPod display). Features such as the equalizer cannot
) function simultaneously with the MULTI-ZONE feature (page 56).
.
51
En
Page 52
08
Other connections
1 Use the press
• To return to the previous level, press
2 Use the
/
buttons to select a category then
ENTER
to browse that category.
/
buttons to browse the selected
RETURN
.
category (e.g., albums).
• Use
/
to move to previous/next levels.
3 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play, then press
to start playback.
1
Navigation through audio categories on your iPod looks like this:
Playlists  Songs Artists  Albums  Songs Albums  Songs Songs Podcasts Genres  Artists  Albums  Songs Composers  Albums  Songs Audiobooks Shuffle Songs
Tip
• You can play all of the songs in a particular category by selecting the
All
item at the top of each category list. For example, you can play all the songs by a particular artist.
Basic playback controls
The following table shows the basic playback controls for your iPod:
Button What it does
/
/
Press to start playback. If you start playback when something other than a song is selected, all the songs that fall into that category will play.
Press to stop playback.
Pauses playback, or restarts playback when paused.
Press and hold during playback to start scanning.
Press to skip to previous/next song.
Press repeatedly to switch between
Repeat All
and
Repeat Off
.
Repeat One
,
Button
DISP
/
/
TOP MENU
RETURN
What it does
Press repeatedly to switch between
Shuffle Albums
Press repeatedly to change the song playback information displayed.
During playback, press to skip to previous/next playlist; when browsing, press to move to previous/ next levels.
During Audiobook playback, press to switch the playback speed: Faster
Press to return to the
Press to return to the previous level.
and
Shuffle Off
iPod Top
Shuffle Songs
.
Normal  Slower
menu screen.
Watching photos and video content
To view photos or video on your iPod, since video control is not possible using this receiver, you must use the main
controls of your iPod instead.
1 Press
PHOTO
to switch to the iPod controls for
2
photo and video playback.
The receiver controls will be unavailable while you are watching iPod videos or browsing photos.
2 Press
PHOTO
again to switch back to the receiver
controls when you’re done.
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Connecting using HDMI
If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component, you can connect it to this receiver using a
commercially available HDMI cable. The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital
video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the connected component is compatible with, including DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio (see below for limitations), Video CD/Super VCD, CD and MP3. See
About the video converter
on page 13 for more on HDMI
compatibility.
3
,
52
En
Note
1 If you’re in the song category, you can also press 2 Your iPod nano currently restricts viewing of photo images stored. 3• An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVI audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.
• If you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP, a HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front panel display. Some components
that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction.
• This receiver has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) Version 1.3a. Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers. Also, when using a component with HDMI version 1.0, it is not possible to output copy-controlled DVD-Audio CPPM sources from the HDMI connection.
• This receiver supports the DeepColor feature of HDMI. However, when analog signals are input, this receiver cannot output signals in DeepColor.
• This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these formats, however, make sure that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corresponding format.
ENTER
to start playback.
HDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support
Page 53
Other connections
C
A
E
08
HDMI/DVI-equipped component
HDMI OUT
OPTICAL
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
1
IN (TV/
2
IN (BD)
3
IN (
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN (
CD-R
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
IN
(
DVD/
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
SAT
)
)
)
)
1
1
(CD)
ASSIGNABLE
4
2
DIGITAL
41
HDMI
1
IN
2
IN
3
IN
4
IN
OUT
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN
OUT
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
P
B
PR
2
IN
Y
(BD)
P
B
PR
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
1
IN
2
IN
(
VIDEO/GAME
(
DVD/LD
(BD)
ASSIGN­ABLE
FM UNBAL 75 W
IR
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
)
21
OUT
Y
P
B
PR
3
IN
Y
P
B
PR
1)
31
MONI­TOR OUT
S-VIDEO
MONI­TOR OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEO AUDIO
DVD/LD
TV/SAT
VIDEO / GAME 1
OUT
IN
BD
IN
IN
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
AM LOOP
R
ANTENNA
ZONE2ZONE2
R L
PHONO
IN
L
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
IN
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
AUDIO
R
R
R
SURROUND B
1
12 V TRIGG
(
DC OUT 12V/ TOTAL 50 mA MAX
)
VSX-LX70
HDMI IN
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor or plasma display
1 Use an HDMI cable to connect one of the HDMI IN interconnects on this receiver to an HDMI output on your HDMI component.
HDMI
indicator lights on the front panel when an HDMI-
equipped component is connected.
2 Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT interconnect on this receiver to an HDMI interconnect on an HDMI-compatible monitor.
• The arrow on the cable connector body should be facing right for correct alignment with the connector on the player.
• Set the HDMI parameter in on page 68 to
THROUGH
Setting the Audio options
if you want to hear HDMI audio output from your TV or plasma display (no sound will be heard from this receiver).
• If the video signal does not appear on your TV or plasma display, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, use an analog video connection.
• You can’t hear HDMI audio through this receiver’s digital out jacks.
About HDMI
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) supports both video and audio on a single digital connection for use with DVD players, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide the technologies of High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface (DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant displays.
HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced, or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel surround-sound audio. HDMI features include uncompressed digital video, one connector (instead of several cables and connectors), and communication between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.
HDMI, the logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs
For DVD Audio and SACD playback, your DVD player may have 5.1, 6.1 or 7.1 channel analog outputs (depending on whether your player supports surround back
channels). multichannel analog audio.
1
Make sure that the player is set to output
3 Use the
INPUT SELECT
button to select the HDMI
input you’ve connected to (for example, HDMI 2).
You can also perform the same operation by using the
INPUT SELECTOR HDMI (SHIFT+TV CTRL
dial on the front panel or by pressing
) on the remote control
repeatedly.
Note
1 To listen to multichannel analog audio you’ll need to switch the input signal selector to for more on this).
MULTI CH IN
(see
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs
below
53
En
Page 54
08
Other connections
1 Connect the front, surround, center and subwoofer outputs on your DVD player to the corresponding
MULTI CH
• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the
2 If your DVD player also has outputs for surround back channels, connect these to the corresponding
MULTI CH
• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the
• If there is a single surround back output, connect it to
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs
If you have connected a decoder or a DVD player as above, you must select the analog multichannel inputs
for surround sound playback.
1 Make sure you have set the playback source to the proper output setting.
For example, you might need to set your DVD player to output multichannel analog audio.
2 Use the
IN
.
You can also use the panel.
• Depending on the DVD player you’re using, the
input jack on this receiver.
connections.
input jacks on this receiver.
connections.
the
SURROUND BACK L (Single)
jack on this
receiver.
1
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
DVD TV
INPUT SELECT
INPUT SELECTOR
CD-R
HDMI
BD TV CTRL
button to select
dial on the front
MULTI CH
analog output level of the subwoofer channel may be too low. In this case, the output level of the subwoofer can be increased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In Setup in Other Setup. For details, see
Setup
on page 66.
Multi Channel Input
Speaker B setup
Caution
Before making or changing the connections
the power and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet. Plugging in components should be the last connection you make with your system.
• Be careful not to allow any contact between speaker wires from different terminals.
• You can use speakers with a nominal impedance between 6
speaker impedance
to 16 Ω (please see
on page 71 if you plan to use
Switching the
speakers with an impedance of less than 8
After selecting
setting
Speaker B
on page 40, you can use the speakers connected
in
Surround back speaker
to the (surround back) B speaker terminals on the rear panel to listen to stereo playback in another room. See
Switching the speaker system
below for the listening
options with this setup.
1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back speaker terminals on the rear panel.
Connect them the same way you connected your speakers in Make sure to review
Installing your speaker system
Placing the speakers
when placing the speakers in another room.
2 Select ‘
Speaker B
’ from the ‘Surr Back System’
menu.
See
Surround back speaker setting
on page 40 to do this.
Switching the speaker system
If you selected
setting
possible using the
Normal (default)
simply switch your main speaker system on or off. The options below are for the
Use the SPEAKERS button on the front panel to select a speaker system setting.
As mentioned above, if you have selected
(default)
speaker system (A) on or off.
Speaker B
in
Surround back speaker
on page 40, three speaker system settings are
SPEAKERS
or
Front Bi-Amp
button. If you selected
, the button will
Speaker B
setting only.
, the button will simply switch your main
, switch off
).
on page 19.
on page 20
2
Normal
54
En
Note
1• When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, you can’t use Midnight/Loudness, Dialog Enhancement or the
ANALOG ATT
• When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, only the volume and channel levels can be set.
• You can’t listen to your speaker B (Second Zone) system during playback from the multichannel inputs. 2• The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).
• Depending on the settings in
• All speaker systems (except
buttons, as well as any of the listening modes (including
Manual speaker setup
Surround back speaker setting
Speaker B
connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.
on page 40 output from the surround back pre-out terminals may change.
STEREO
and the surround back channel processing).
on page 48. However, if SPB is selected above, no sound is heard
SIGNAL SELECT
and
Page 55
Other connections
PARAMETER
AUDIO VIDEO
PHONES
(TUNE)
(ST) (ST)
ENTER
(TUNE)
SETUP
RETURN
TUNER EDITSPEAKERS BAND
MCACC
USB
SETUP MIC
MULTI – ZONE &
SIGNAL
SOURCE/REC SEL
CONTROL ON/OFF
SELECT
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO L RAUDIO
SB ch
PROCESSING
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
2 Select the ‘Front Bi-Amp’ setting from the ‘Surr Back System’ menu.
See
Surround back speaker setting
on page 40 to specify
how you’re using the surround back speaker terminals.
08
Press repeatedly to choose a speaker system option:
SPA
– Sound is output from speaker system A and
the same signal is output from the pre-out terminals.
SPB
– Sound is output from the two speakers connected to speaker system B. Multichannel sources will not be heard. The same signal is output from the surround back channel pre-out terminals.
SPAB
– Sound is output from speaker system A (up to 5 channels, depending on the source), the two speakers in speaker system B, and the subwoofer. The sound from speaker system B will be the same as the sound from speaker system A (multichannel sources will be downmixed to 2 channels).
SP (off) – No sound is output from the speakers. The
same sound is output from the pre-out terminals (including from your subwoofer, if connected) as when selecting speaker system A (above).
Bi-amping your front speakers
Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver and low frequency driver of your speakers to different amplifiers (in this case, to both front and surround back terminals) for better crossover performance. Your speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.
1 Connect your speakers as shown below.
This illustration below shows the connections for bi­amping your front left speaker. Hook up your front right speaker in the same way.
Front left
speaker
SPEAKERS
A
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND
RL R LRL(Single)
High
SURROUND BACK /
B
SELECTABLE
Caution
• Most speakers with both have two metal plates that connect the
Low
terminals. These must be removed when you are
High
and
Low
terminals
High
to the
bi-amping the speakers or you could severely damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for more information.
• If your speakers have a removable crossover network, make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping. Doing so may damage your speakers.
Bi-wiring your speakers
The reasons for bi-wiring are basically the same as bi­amping, but additionally, interference effects within the wire could be reduced, producing better sound. Again, to do this your speakers must be bi-wireable (that is they must have separate terminals for the high and low frequencies). When bi-wiring, make sure you’ve selected
Normal (default)
setting
on page 40.
To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to the speaker terminal on the receiver.
Caution
• Make sure you use a parallel (not series, which are fairly uncommon) connection when bi-wiring your speakers.
• Don’t connect different speakers from the same terminal in this way.
or
Speaker B
in
Surround back speaker
Low
Since both front and surround back speaker terminals output the same audio, it doesn’t matter which set (front or surround back) is powering which part (
High
or
Low
of the speaker.
• Make sure that the
+
/ – connections are properly
inserted.
)
55
En
Page 56
08
A
R
F
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
FM UNBAL 75 W
AM LOOP
MONI­TOR OUT
MONI­TOR OUT
OUT
CD
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
DVD/LD
BD
TV/SAT
IN
IN
IN
CONTROL
OUT
PHONO
IN
IN
IN
Y Y
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
ANTENNA
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
IN
1
IN
2
ZONE2ZONE2
ZONE2
MAIN
(TV/
SAT
)
(BD)
( DVD/
LD
)
1
IN
2
( DVR/
VCR 1
)
IN
3
IN
OUT
1
IN
1
IN
2
R L
HDMI
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
IR
(
DVD/LD
)
(BD)
IN
1
IN
2
IN
1
R
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
LAN (10/100)
Other connections
Connecting additional amplifiers
This receiver has more than enough power for any home use, but it’s possible to add additional amplifiers to every channel of your system using the pre-outs. Make the connections shown below to add amplifiers to power your speakers.
• Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet.
ANALOG
INPUT
PRE OUT
LR
FRONT
CENTER
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
SUR­ROUND BACK
(
)
Single
LR
L
L
CENTER
FRONT
FRONT
A
IN
R
iPod
L
BACK
RS-232C
2
MULTI CH IN
GER
)
X
VSX-LX70
• You can use the additional amplifier on the surround back channel pre-outs for a single speaker as well. In this case plug the amplifier into the left (L (Single)) terminal only.
• The sound from the surround back terminals will depend on how you have configured the Surround back speaker setting on page 40.
• To hear sound only from the pre-outs, switch the speaker system to OFF, or simply disconnect any speakers that are connected directly to the receiver.
• If you’re not using a subwoofer, change the front speaker setting (see Speaker Setting on page 48) to large.
L R
ANALOG
INPUT
ANALOG
INPUT
ANALOG
INPUT
L R
ANALOG
INPUT
L R
Front channel amplifier
Center channel amplifier (mono)
Powered subwoofer
Surround channel amplifier
Surround back channel amplifier
MULTI-ZONE listening
This receiver can power up to three independent systems in separate rooms after you have made the proper MULTI­ZONE connections. An example MULTI-ZONE setup is shown below, but the number of MULTI-ZONE connections (and the way you choose to connect them) depends on how you want to set up your system.
ASSIGN­ABLE
21
Sub zone (ZONE 2)Sub zone (ZONE 3) Main zone
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
IN
1
OUT2
MAIN
IN
2
LAN (10/100)
ZONE2
HDMI
OPTICAL
1
IN
CONTROL
1
IN
IN
(TV/
)
SAT
OUT
2
IN
2
IN
(BD)
1
IN
Y
3
IN ( DVR/
( DVD/
)
VCR 1
)
LD
3
IN
4
B
P
IN (
)
CD-R
1
4
ASSIGN­ABLE
P
R
1
1
2
IN ( DVD/
4
IN
2
IN
)
LD
Y
(CD)
2
IN
(BD)
COAXIAL
B
P
OUT
P
DIGITAL IN
R
E C E I V E R
I N P U T S E L E C T
S Y S T E
M O
SO
F F
U R
C E
C D
D V
T
D
V
V
S
I D
A
E
T
D
O
VR
2
2
V
I D E O
DV
C
1
D
R
-
1
R
T
V C O
X
i
N
M
Po
T
R
A
d
D I O
T
R
U
OO
NE
M 2
R
/3 S L E E P
R E C E
I
V
E
R
V I D E O S E
L S R +
A N
A L O G
A
T
D
T I M M E R
D . A C C E S
S + 1 0
A V P A
R A
T O
C
M
L
P
E
A
T
S
M E
S
E
R N U
D
I
E
S
N
C
T E R
D T V
T U
ME
N E
N U
C H L
S T
E
S
V
E T
E
U
L
M
P
E N U
E N T
ST
E R
G
T
C
U
.
A
E
T
I
D
D
E G
I
E
T
O
R Y
T U N E
R E T
U R N
T V
C O
B
N
A
T
N
R
D
O
T V
L
V O
L I N
P U
S
T E L
E
C
T
T
V
C H
V
O L
R E C
DT
V
MP
I
N
F
X
O
M U T
E R E
C S T
A
O
U
P
D
I
M
O
E
M
S
O
U
R
B
Y
D
T I S
I
T P
L E H D
D S T A T U
DV S
C H
S
D I G NA L SE
C
L
H
S B
MU
c
h L T I O P E
S T E R E
T
O H X S TAN
S H
D
I
F
A
T
R D A D
V
I
.
S
S
O
U
P
R
H
R A S E M CA CC
S . D I R
E
C
T
R EC E I V
ER
R E C
E I V E R
I S N E P L U E T
C
C
D
D
T
V
D
D
D
V R
V
2
R 1
T
S
V
A
C
S
T
S
D
i
Y
L
P
AV
SO
-
E
S
D
R
o
E
T
T
S
.
P
d
A
E
O
R
PA
CC
U
V
DT
+
M
P
I
V
R
D
E
R V M
O
S
S
I
E
A
D
C
M
S
X
ET
F
O
EN
M
E
M
E
+
E
F
T
O
G
2
N
R
1
UP
E
U
U
A
0
1
U
U
TE
D
N
I
I O
E
D
V
R
R
I
E
D
C
S
D
A
E
S
E
T
T
O
I
L
T
V
M
E
T
R
C
M
G
V
T
OO
O
U
R
O
V
E
N
E
R
R
N
O
C
M
E
Y
L
T
E
2
I V
/3
E
TU
E
N
T
R
NE
M
V
T
I
A
S
N
E
N
P
A
E
C
A
R
PUT
A
X
L
T
O
U
L
CL
E
T
O
N
D D
C
G
S
E
A
I
NT
TR
IO
TA
T
S
S
P
C
M
S
S
R
E
T
T
O
H
U
E
R
U
C
L
L
D
SU
M
T
L S T
I
S
V
E
S
I
E OPE
H
V
B
C
T
N
C
SI
B
T
E
I
.
D
H
U
E
F
G
A
I
R
L
T
T
D
NA
T
V
N
E
L
R
T I
D
E
INFO
T
E
L
UR
C
S
T
IS
ST
H
E
N
V
L
O
X
H
OP
O
P
D
C
L
H
H
D
M
A
S B
ME
S
UT
S
E
TA
c h
M E
N
RE
D
O
M
DV
A
R
CA
R
Y
C
CEIV
D
ST
H
D
C
C
E
A
R
D
E
V.
O
ER
SU S . DI
RR R E C T
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
IR receiver
R
41
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
Different sources can be playing in three zones at the same time or, depending on your needs, the same source can also be used (however, if iPod or HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-LX70 only) is selected in the main zone, it cannot also be selected in the sub zone). The main and sub zones have independent power (the main zone power can be off while one (or both) of the sub zones is on) and the sub zones can be controlled by the remote or front panel controls. However, you may need to specify the volume settings in ZONE Audio Setup on page 66.
Making MULTI-ZONE connections
It is possible to make these connections if you have a separate TV and speakers for your primary (ZONE 2) sub
zone, and a separate amplifier secondary (ZONE 3) sub zone. You will also need a separate amplifier if you are not using the Surround Back System setup (see below) for your primary sub zone. There are two primary sub zone setups possible with this system. Choose whichever works best for you.
1
(and speakers) for your
AUDIO
ANTENNA
MULTI-ZONE
PHONO
& SOURCE
AM LOOP
FM UNBAL 75 W
IR
IN
ZONE2ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
R L
CD
IN
OUT
MONI­TOR
MONI-
DVD/LD
OUT
TOR
(
)
1
DVD/LD
IN
OUT
IN
(BD)
2
IN
ASSIGN-
OUT
ABLE
BD
21
IN
CD-R/ TAPE/
OUT
MD
TV/SAT
Y
IN
1
IN
IN
R
VIDEO /
B
P
GAME 1
2
IN
IN
SUB W.
OUT
P
R
SUR-
DVR/
ROUND
VCR 1
3
IN
IN
Y
OUT
B
P
DVR/
SURROUND BACK
VCR 2
P
R
IN
1
(
12 V TRIGGER
1)
VIDEO/GAME
R L
( DC OUT 12V/
31
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
S-VIDEO
VIDEO AUDIO
L
LLRR
CENTE
2
)
Note
1 You can’t use sound controls (such as the tone controls or Midnight listening) or any surround modes with a separate amplifier in the sub zone. You
56
En
can, however, use the features available with your sub zone amplifier.
Page 57
Other connections
D
R
O
1
U
U
FM UNBAL 75 W
AM LOOP
MONI­TOR OUT
MONI­TOR OUT
OUT
CD
CD-R/ TAPE/
DVD/LD
BD
IN
IN
CONTROL
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
1
IN
2
ZONE2ZONE2
ZONE2
MAIN
R L
& SOURCE
IR
(
DVD/LD
)
(BD)
ASSIGN­ABLE
IN
1
IN
2
21
SELECTABLE
L RL
( Single
)
UND SURROUND BACK /
B
FM UNBAL 75
MONI­TOR OUT
MONI­TOR OUT
DVD/LD
CONTROL
OUT
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
IR
(
DVD/LD
)
(BD)
ASSIGN­ABLE
IN
1
IN
2
C
C TA M
I
S
S R
O
P
I
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
IN
1
IN
2
ZONE2
MAIN
HDMI
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
LAN (10/100)
08
MULTI-ZONE listening options
The following table shows what you can listen to in each sub zone:
Sub Zone Input sources available
ZONE2
ZONE3
a.With the channels.
Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (
1 Connect a separate amplifier to the
SOURCE OUT ZONE & SOURCE MONITOR OUT
iPod, the built-in tuner and other analog audio sources.a With video sources, only composite
video is possible. Only digital audio sources (the input source
must already be assigned using the
Setup menu
MULTI CH IN
on page 64) are available.
input, sound is output only from the front L/R
ZONE 2
)
jacks and a TV monitor to the
jacks, both on the
The Input
MULTI-ZONE &
MULTI-
rear of this receiver.
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration.
Sub zone Main zone
Connect a TV monitor to the
SOURCE MONITOR OUT
MULTI-ZONE &
jacks on the rear of this
receiver.
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the surround back speaker terminals as shown below.
Sub zone Main zone
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK /
AC IN
SPEAKERS
B
(
)
Single
SELECTABLE
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MULTI-ZONE
/REC SEL
& SOURCE
OUT1
FM UNBAL 75
ZONE3
IN
IR
1
OUT2
MAIN
OUT
IN
2
LAN (10/100)
ZONE2
HDMI
MONI­TOR
OPTICAL
1
IN
OUT
(
)
1
DVD/LD
CONTROL
IN
(BD)
2
IN
1
IN
IN
ASSIGN-
(TV/
)
SAT
ABLE
21
OUT
2
IN
2
IN
(BD)
1
OUT
IN
Y
Y
3
IN (
DVR/
( DVD/
)
VCR 1
)
LD
3
IN
4
P
P
B
B
IN (
)
CD-R
1
4
ASSIGN­ABLE
P
R
P
R
1
1
2
IN (
DVD/
4
IN
3
2
IN
IN
)
LD
Y
Y
(CD)
2
IN
(BD)
COAXIAL
P
P
B
B
OUT
P
R
P
R
ASSIGNABLE
(
1)
VIDEO/GAME
41
ASSIGNABLE
31
S-VIDEO
DIGITAL
COMPONENT VIDEO
Secondary MULTI-ZONE setup (
ANTENNA
AM LOOP
ZONE2ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
R
L
OUT
MONI-
DVD/LD TOR OUT
IN
BD
IN
TV/SAT
1
IN
IN
VIDEO /
GAME 1
2
IN
IN
OUT
DVR/ VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/ VCR 2
IN
R L
VIDEO AUDIO
ZONE 3
PRE OUT
AUDIO
PHONO
IN
SUB W. CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
IN
R
L
LLRR
FRONT
CENTER
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
SURROUND BACK
RS-232C
2
1
MULTI CH IN
12 V TRIGGER
(
DC OUT 12V/
)
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
Connect a separate amplifier to the
LR
FRONT
CENTER
SUR­ROUND
SUR­ROUND BACK
(
)
Single
LR
FRONT
A
IN
RL RLRL
iPod
)
OUT1 ZONE3
digital output on the rear of this receiver.
The amplifier must have an optical digital input to make this connection. This will allow you to hear the digital
output of a component in a second sub zone.
1
Surround Back System MULTI-ZONE setup (
You must select on page 40 to use this setup. Note that the sound in the sub zone will be temporarily interrupted when controlling the main zone (for example, changing the input source or starting playback).
Note
1 Only one sub zone is possible if you connect the
ZONE 2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
IN
1
OUT2
MAIN
IN
2
LAN (10/100)
ZONE2
HDMI
OPTICAL
1
IN
CONTROL
1
IN
IN
(TV/
)
SAT
OUT
2
IN
2
IN
(BD)
1
IN
Y
3
IN (
DVR/
( DVD/
)
VCR 1
)
LD
3
IN
4
B
P
IN (
)
CD-R
1
4
ASSIGN­ABLE
PR
1
1
2
IN (
DVD/
4
IN
2
IN
)
LD
Y
(CD)
2
IN
(BD)
COAXIAL
B
P
OUT
PR
ASSIGNABLE
41
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
COMPONENT VIDEO
ANTENNA
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
AM LOOP
FM UNBAL 75 W
IR
ZONE2ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
R L
OUT
MONI­TOR
MONI-
OUT
DVD/LD
TOR
(
)
1
DVD/LD
IN
OUT
IN
(BD)
2
IN
ASSIGN­ABLE
BD
21
IN
OUT
TV/SAT
Y
1
IN
IN
VIDEO /
B
P
GAME 1
2
IN
IN
OUT
PR
DVR/
VCR 1
3
IN
IN
Y
OUT
B
P
DVR/
VCR 2
PR
IN
(
1)
VIDEO/GAME
R L
31
S-VIDEO
VIDEO AUDI O
ZONE 2
in
Surround back speaker setting
OUT1 ZONE3
A
PHON
IN
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SUR­ROUN
R
SU
1
(
DC O
TOTAL
Sub zone (ZONE 3)
)
digital output to your second sub zone.
DIGITAL IN
Main zone
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
IN
1
OUT2
MAIN
IN
2
LAN (10/100)
ZONE2
HDMI
OPTICAL
1
IN
CONTROL
1
IN
IN
(TV/
)
SAT
OUT
2
IN
2
IN
(BD)
1
IN
Y
3
IN (
DVR/
( DVD/
)
VCR 1
)
LD
3
IN
4
B
P
IN (
)
CD-R
4
1
ASSIGN­ABLE
PR
1
21
IN (
DVD/
4
IN
2
IN
)
LD
Y
(CD)
2
IN
(BD)
COAXIAL
P
B
OUT
PR
ASSIGNABLE
41
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
COMPONENT VIDEO
ANTENNA
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
AM LOOP
FM UNBAL 75 W
IR
ZONE2ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
L
R
OUT
MONI­TOR
MONI-
OUT
DVD/LD
TOR
(
)
1
DVD/LD
IN
OUT
IN
(BD)
2
IN
ASSIGN­ABLE
BD
21
IN
OUT
TV/SAT
Y
I
1
IN
IN
VIDEO /
B
P
GAME 1
2
IN
IN
OUT
PR
DVR/
VCR 1
3
IN
IN
Y
OUT
P
B
DVR/
VCR 2
PR
IN
(
1)
VIDEO/GAME
R L
31
S-VIDEO
VIDEO AUDIO
57
En
Page 58
08
58
En
Other connections
TUNER
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls
The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust the sub zone volume and select sources.
ZONE remote controls
AUDIO VIDEO
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
PHONES
(ST) (ST)
ENTER
(TUNE)
SETUP
STANDBY/ON
INPUT
SELECTOR
below.
MULTI – ZONE &
MCACC
SETUP MIC
DIGITAL PRECISION
PROCESSING
SOURCE/REC SEL
CONTROL ON/OFF
TUNER EDITSPEAKERS BAND
USB
RETURN
PHASE
ADVANCED
CONTROL
MCACC
PHASE
AUTO SURR/
MCACC
CONTROL
STREAM DIRECT
POSITION
1
See
SIGNAL
SB ch
SELECT
PROCESSING
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO L RAUDIO
DIGITAL VIDEO
SCALER HDMI
HOME
STANDARD
ADVANCED
THX
SURROUND
SURROUND
MULTI-
STEREO/ F.S.SURR
VSX-LX70
MASTER VOLUME
• If you select to select a preset station (see
on page 36 if you’re unsure how to do this).
• You can’t use the iPod or HOME MEDIA GALLERY (
VSX-LX70 only
MULTI-ZONE feature.
4 Use the
MASTER VOLUME
volume.
This is only possible if you selected the volume control in
5 When you’re finished, press return to the main zone controls.
You can also press the
OFF
button on the front panel to switch off all output to
the sub zone(s).
, you can use the
) functions simultaneously using the
dial to adjust the
ZONE Audio Setup
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE ON/
6
MULTI-ZONE remote controls
The following table shows the possible MULTI-ZONE
1 Press the
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE ON/OFF
button
on the front panel.
Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:
ZONE 2 ON
– Selects your primary (
ZONE 2
) sub
zone
ZONE 2&3 ON ZONE 3 ON
– Select both sub zones
– Selects your secondary (
ZONE 3
) sub
zone
MULTI ZONE OFF
– Switches the MULTI-ZONE
feature off
The
MULTI-ZONE
indicator lights when the MULTI-ZONE
control has been switched ON.
2 Press CONTROL to select the sub zone(s) you want.
If you selected between
• When the receiver is on, operations for the sub zone are done while
ZONE 2&3 ON
ZONE 2
and
above, you can toggle
ZONE 3
.
3
make sure that any
ZONE
and your selected sub zone(s) show in the display. If this is not showing, the front panel controls affect the main zone only.
3 Use the
INPUT SELECTOR
dial to select the source
for the zone you have selected.
For example, to the
Note
1 When you use 2 Note that when recording, this also selects the 3 If the receiver is in standby, the display is dimmed, and 4 The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other zone. Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast. 5 The volume levels of the main and sub zones are independent. 6• You won’t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you’ve switched off the MULTI-ZONE control first.
• If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE feature for awhile, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in standby.
7• Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window.
• Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component to check for IR compatibility.
• If using two remote controls (at the same time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel.
ZONE 2 CD-R
CD-R
inputs to the primary (
ZONE 2
, you must set
sends the source connected
ZONE 2
) sub room.
ZONE 2 / RECSEL Setting
RECOUT
in the
input source. See
ZONE
and your selected sub zone(s) continue to show in the display.
remote controls:
Button
SHIFT RECEIVER
What it does
Selects the sub zone you want to control,
+
shown in the display as
RCV/Z3 (ZONE3
).
Switches on/off power in the currently selected sub zone.
Use to select the input source in the currently selected sub zone.
Use to select the input source directly (this may not work for some functions) in the cur­rently selected sub zone.
Use to set the listening volume in the currently
2
INPUT SELECT
Input source buttons
VOL +/–
selected sub zone (ZONE2 only).
Connecting an IR receiver
If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or shelving unit, or you wish to use the sub zone remote control in another zone, you can use an optional IR receiver (such as a Niles or Xantech unit) to control your system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of
this receiver.
ZONE Audio Setup
Making an audio or a video recording
7
menu to
ZONE 2
(page 66).
on page 70 for more on this.
TUNER
controls
Saving station presets
4
VARIABLE
on page 66.
CONTROL
RCV/Z2 (ZONE2
5
again to
) or
Page 59
Other connections
FM UNBAL
MONI- TOR OUT
MON TOR OUT
CONTROL
Y Y
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
M
1
IN
2
ZONE2
ZONE2
MAIN
(
DVD/ LD
)
IN
OUT
1
IN
1
IN
2
HDMI
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
IR
(
DVD/LD
)
(BD)
ASSIGN­ABLE
IN
1
IN
2
IN
21
P
A
O
U
08
1 Connect the IR receiver sensor to the
& SOURCE IR IN
(
MAIN ZONE
) jack on the rear of this
receiver.
If you also plan to use a separate IR receiver in the sub room, connect this to the
ZONE2
jack.
Closet or shelving unit
IR
IN
CONTROL
IN OUT
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MULTI-ZONE
/REC SEL
& SOURCE
OUT1
FM UNBAL 75
ZONE3
IN
IR
1
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
OPTICAL
1
IN (TV/
SAT
2
IN (BD)
3
IN (
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN (
CD-R
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
IN (
DVD/
)
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MAIN
OUT
IN
2
ZONE2
HDMI
MONI- TOR
MONI-
1
IN
OUT
TOR
(
)
1
DVD/LD
CONTROL
IN
OUT
(BD)
2
IN
IN
ASSIGN-
)
ABLE
21
OUT
2
IN
1
OUT
IN
Y
Y
1
IN
( DVD/
)
)
LD
3
IN
B
B
P
P
2
IN
)
1
4
PR
PR
1
2
4
IN
3
2
IN
IN
Y
Y
(CD)
(BD)
P
P
B
B
OUT
PR
PR
ASSIGNABLE
(
1)
VIDEO/GAME
41
ASSIGNABLE
31
S-VIDEO
DIGITAL
COMPONENT VIDEO
Non-Pioneer component
Pioneer component
AUDIO
ANTENNA
PHONO
AM LOOP
IN
ZONE2ZONE2
R
L
CD
IN
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
OUT BD IN
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
TV/SAT
IN IN
R
VIDEO / GAME 1
IN
SUB W.
OUT
SUR-
DVR/
ROUND
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
SURROUND BACK
VCR 2
IN
1
12 V TRIGGER
R L
( DC OUT 12V/ TOTAL 50 mA MAX
VIDEO AUDIO
MULTI-ZONE
PRE OUT
LR
FRONT
CENTER
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
SUR­ROUND BACK
(
)
Single
LR
L
LLRR
SPEAKERS
FRONT
FRONT
A
IN
RL
CENTER
iPod
RS-232C
2
MULTI CH IN
)
Connect the 12 V TRIGGER jack of this receiver to the 12 V trigger of another component.
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the connection.
• The trigger maximum power is DC OUT 12 V/50 mA.
After you’ve specified the input functions that will switch on the trigger, you’ll be able to switch the component on or off just by pressing the input function(s) you’ve set on page 64.
Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display
If you have a Pioneer plasma display, you can use an SR+ cable
of various convenient features, such as automatic video input switching of the plasma display when the input is
changed.
IR receiver
2 Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE IR OUT
jack on the rear of this
receiver to link it to the IR receiver.
Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for the type of cable necessary for the connection.
• If you want to link a Pioneer component to the IR receiver, see
with this unit’s sensor
CONTROL
Operating other Pioneer components
on page 79 to connect to the
jacks instead of the
IR OUT
jack.
Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger
You can connect components in your system (such as a screen or projector) to this receiver so that they switch on or off using 12 volt triggers when you select an input function. However, you must specify which input functions switch on the trigger using the
menu
on page 64. Note that this will only work with
components that have a standby mode.
The Input Setup
12V
TRIGGER
1
to connect it to this unit and take advantage
2
CONTROL
OUT
Pioneer plasma
display
MULTI-ZONE
OPTICAL
& SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
1
IN (TV/
SAT
2
IN (BD)
3
IN (
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN (
CD-R
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
IN (
DVD/
)
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
)
)
1
1
(CD)
)
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
IN
IR
1
ZONE2
MAIN
OUT
IN
2
ZONE2
HDMI
1
IN
2
IN
3
IN
4
2
4
IN
OUT
41
CONTROL
IN
OUT
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
B
P
PR
2
IN
Y
(BD)
B
P
PR
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
(
1
IN
(BD)
2
IN
(
VIDEO/GAME
DVD/LD
ASSIGN­ABLE
MONI­TOR OUT
)
21
OUT
Y
B
P
PR
3
IN
Y
B
P
PR
1)
31
S-VIDEO
FM UNBAL 75 W
MONI­TOR OUT
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEO A
AM LOO
Z
R
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
BD IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
R
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
R L
VIDEO AUDIO
SURROUND BACK
1
12 V TRIGGER
(
DC OUT 12V/ TOTAL 50 mA MAX
LR
RS-232C
2
MULTI CH IN
)
Note
1 The 3-ringed SR+ cable from Pioneer is commercially available under the part number ADE7095. Contact the Pioneer Customer Support division for more information on obtaining an SR+ cable (you can also use a commercially available 3-ringed mini phone plug for the connection). 2 This receiver is compatible with all SR+ equipped Pioneer plasma displays from 2003 onward.
59
En
Page 60
08
Other connections
Important
• You can’t use the SR+ features when HDMI Control is set to ON. Make sure to set HDMI Control to OFF when you use the SR+ features (page 63).
• If you connect to a Pioneer plasma display using an SR+ cable, you will need to point the remote control at the plasma display remote sensor to control the receiver. In this case, you won’t be able to control the receiver using the remote control if you switch the plasma display off.
• Before you can use the extra SR+ features, you need to make a few settings in the receiver. See
Setup menu plasma displays
on page 64 and
SR+ Setup for Pioneer
on page 66 for detailed instructions.
The Input
Use a 3-ringed miniplug SR+ cable to connect the
CONTROL IN OUT
jack of your plasma display.
DVD player
jack of this receiver with the
VIDEO
INPUT 1
Pioneer plasma
display
Satellite receiver, etc
DVD/LD
AUDIO IN
STANDBY/ON
INPUT
SELECTOR
ADVANCED
PHASE
DIGITAL PRECISION
MCACC
CONTROL
PROCESSING
AUTO SURR/
MCACC
PHASE
STREAM DIRECT
POSITION
CONTROL
DIGITAL VIDEO
SCALER HDMI
HOME
THX
CONTROL
VIDEO
INPUT 2
SAT
AUDIO IN
VSX-LX70
STANDARD
ADVANCED
SURROUND
SURROUND
MASTER VOLUME
This receiver
To make the most of the SR+ features, you should connect your source components (DVD player, etc.) in a slightly different way to that described in this chapter. For each component, connect the video output directly to the plasma display, and just connect the audio (analog and/ or digital) to this receiver.
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer plasma display
When connected using an SR+ cable, a number of features become available to make using this receiver with your Pioneer plasma display even easier. These features include:
• On-screen displays when making receiver settings, such as speaker setup, MCACC setup, and so on.
• On-screen volume display.
• On-screen display of listening mode.
• Automatic video input switching on the plasma display.
• Automatic volume muting on the plasma display.
See also page 66 for more on setting up the receiver.
1 Make sure that the plasma display and this receiver are switched on and that they are connected with the SR+ cable.
See above for more on connecting these components.
2 To switch SR+ mode on/off, press the SR+ button.
The front panel display shows
SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays
on
Important
• The SR+ features do not work when any of the iPod or HOME MEDIA GALLERY (
VSX-LX70 only
) function is
selected.
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PROGRAM
SLEEP
+
SR
CLEAR +
10
TUNE
ST ST
TUNE
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
BD TV CTRL
TUNER
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display
ENTER
DIMMER
GENRE
CH LEVEL
CLASS
ENTER
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
RETURNRETURN
ANALOG ATT
DISC
• Make sure you have also selected the display input to which you’ve connected the receiver in
Setup menu
on page 64.
SR+ ON
The Input
RECEIVER
or
SR+ OFF
, then
.
• The automatic video input switching and the automatic volume muting features are enabled separately; see
SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays
on page 66.
60
En
Page 61
Other connections
Use a commercially-available cable to connect the RS-
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output
When using the Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional (see page 43) to calibrate the reverb characteristics of your listening room, you can graphically check the results on your computer connected to this receiver. Also, when the Full Band Phase Control function is activated, you can visually check the calibrated characteristics of group delay of the speakers and the corrected characteristics of group delay processed by the exclusive correction filter by installing the corresponding PC application on your computer. Use a commercially-available RS-232C cable to connect the RS-232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C jack on the back panel of this receiver (the cable must be cross type, female-female).
The software to output the results is available by contacting the Pioneer Authorized Distributor for your area (as listed on page 95 of this manual) as well as the instructions necessary for using it.
Please make sure your system meets the following requirements:
• Operating system must be Microsoft
®
or Windows
2000.
• CPU must be at least Pentium 3 / 300 MHz or AMD K6 / 300 MHz (or equivalent) with at least 128 MB of memory, and your monitor must be able to display a minimum resolution of 800x600.
• An RS-232C port connector is necessary for graphical output. Refer to the operating instructions and/or the PC manufacturer for more information on making the proper port settings.
• System must have internet access.
Connect your computer to the RS-232C jack on the rear panel of the receiver.
Make sure that the receiver and all connected components are switched off and disconnected from the
power outlet when you do this.
1
®
Windows® XP
232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C jack on this receiver. See the documentation provided with the Advanced MCACC application for more information.
Advanced MCACC output using your PC
Before continuing, make sure you have completed step 1 in
Data Management
data is erased when the receiver is turned off.
1 Select ‘Output PC’ and press
When the receiver is ready for transmission,
MCACC application on your PC
2 Start the MCACC application on your computer.
Follow the instructions provided with the application. It will take about ten seconds for the transmission to complete, then you will be able to analyze the output on your computer. Since the data will be cleared from the receiver when you restart reverb measurement or turn off the receiver, you might want to save the information on your PC after measurement.
3 When you’re finished, press
You will return to the Data Management menu. Continue with other settings in the Data Management menu if necessary. Press Management menu.
DVD/LD
5. Data Management
a. MCACC Data Check b. Memory Rename c. MCACC Memory Copy d. MCACC Memory Clear
e. Output PC
RETURN
RS-232C
Personal computer
on page 46. Note that transmission
ENTER
.
Start the
shows on the OSD.
-
55.0
:Return
dB
DVD/LD
5e. Output PC
Start the MCACC application on your PC.
RETURN
-
55.0
:Cancel
.
dB
again to exit the Data
08
Note
1 Make sure that you do this before continuing to the (measurement data is cleared if you switch off the power).
Reverb Measurement
option in
Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
on page 44
61
En
Page 62
09
C
A
E
HDMI Control
Chapter 9
HDMI Control
By connecting this receiver to an HDMI Control­compatible Pioneer plasma display or the HDD/DVD recorder with an HDMI cable, you can control this receiver from the remote control of a connected plasma display, as well as have the connected plasma display automatically change inputs in response to operations carried out on this unit.
Refer to the operating manual for your plasma display for more information about which operations can be carried out by connecting via HDMI cable.
• You cannot use this function with components that do not support HDMI Control.
• We cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI Control-compatible components other than those made by Pioneer.
Making the HDMI Control connections
You can use synchronized operation for a connected plasma display and up to four other components (including a maximum of two recorders or players).
Be sure to connect the plasma display’s audio cable to the audio input of this unit.
Important
• When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch the power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket. After completing all connections, connect the power cords to the wall socket.
• After connecting this receiver to an AC outlet, a 15 second initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during initialization. The HDMI indicator on the display unit blinks during initialization, and you can turn this receiver on once it has stopped blinking.
• To get the most out of this function, we recommend that you connect your HDMI component not to a plasma display but rather directly to the HDMI terminal on this receiver.
HDMI Control-compatible
HDD/DVD Recorder
HDMI OUT
MULTI-ZONE
OPTICAL
& SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
1
IN (TV/
SAT
2
IN (BD)
3
IN (
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN (
CD-R
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
IN (
DVD/
)
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
)
)
1
1
(CD)
)
4
2
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
41
HDMI
1
IN
2
IN
3
IN
4
IN
OUT
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN IN
IN
OUT
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
B
P
PR
2
IN
Y
(BD)
B
P
PR
(
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
(
1
DVD/LD
(BD)
2
ASSIGN­ABLE
VIDEO/GAME
IR
OUT
MONI­TOR OUT
)
21
OUT
Y
B
P
PR
3
IN
Y
B
P
PR
1)
31
S-VIDEO
DIGITAL OUT
HDMI IN
HDMI Control-compatible Pioneer plasma display
FM UNBAL 75 W
MONI- TOR OUT
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
DVD/LD
1
IN
VIDEO / GAME 1
2
IN
VIDEO AUDIO
AM LOOP
R
OUT
IN
BD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
VSX-LX70
AUDIO
ANTENNA
PHONO
IN
ZONE2ZONE2
L
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
R
SURROUND B
1
R L
(
DC OUT 12V/ TOTAL 50 mA MAX
AUDIORL
AV OUT
12 V TRIGG
)
62
En
Page 63
HDMI Control
Setting the HDMI options
You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as HDMI Control-compatible connected components in order to make use of the HDMI Control function. For more information see the operating instructions for each component.
09
3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is connected to this receiver, and see if video output from connected components displays properly on the screen on not.
4 Check whether the components connected to all HDMI inputs are properly displayed.
Setting the HDMI Control mode
Choose whether to set this unit’s HDMI Control function
ON
or
OFF
. You will need to set it to ON to use the HDMI
Control function.
• When using a TV not manufactured by Pioneer, put this setting to
OFF
.
1 Press RECEIVER on the remote control, then press the SETUP button.
2 Select ‘Other Setup’ then press ENTER. 3 Select ‘HDMI Control Setup’ from the Other Setup
menu.
DVD/LD
8. Other Setup
a. Multi Ch In Setup b. ZONE Audio Setup c. SR+ Setup
d. HDMI Control Setup
e. OSD Adjustment
4 Select the ‘
-
55.0
dB
:Return
HDMI Control
DVD/LD
8d. HDMI Control Setup
HDMI Control OFF
’ setting you want.
-
55.0
:Finish
dB
•ON – Enables the HDMI Control function. When this unit’s power is turned off and you have a supported source begin playback while using the HDMI Control function, the audio and video output from the HDMI
connection are output from the plasma display.
OFF
– The HDMI Control is disabled. Synchronized
1
operations cannot be used. When this unit’s power is turned off, audio and video of sources connected via HDMI are not output.
5 When you’re finished, press SETUP.
You will finish to System Setup menu.
Before using synchronization
Once you have finished all connections and settings, you must:
1 Put all components into standby mode. 2 Turn the power ON for all components, with the
power for the plasma display being turned on last.
Synchronized amp mode
Synchronized amp mode begins once you carry out an operation for the plasma display. For more information, see the operating manual of your plasma display.
Synchronized amp mode operations
By connecting a component to this receiver with an HDMI cable you can use synchronized amp mode, which allows you to synchronize the following operations:
• Displays on the plasma display when you mute or adjust the volume of this receiver.
• The input of this receiver is automatically changed when playback occurs on a connected component.
• Even if you change this receiver’s input to a device that is not connected by HDMI, the synchronized amp mode remains in effect.
• By pressing
GENRE
when listening to a source from a HDD/DVD recorder, the most appropriate listening mode is automatically selected (see
synchronizing function
on page 34 for more on this).
Using the genre
Canceling synchronized amp mode
If you cancel synchronized amp mode while connected via HDMI to a plasma display or while you are watching a TV programme, the power for this unit is turned off.
About HDMI Control
• Connect the plasma display directly to this receiver. Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors.
• Only connect components you intend to use as a source to the HDMI input of this receiver. Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors.
Note
1• When
HDMI Control
is switched off.
• With
HDMI Control
is set to ON, the audio/video signals input at the
set to ON, Input Setup and HDMI Input are automatically set to OFF.
HDMI IN
terminals are output at the
HDMI OUT
terminal even when this receiver
63
En
Page 64
10
64
En
Other Settings
Chapter 10:
Other Settings
5 Select the input(s) to which you’ve connected your
The Input Setup menu
You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according to the default settings (see
possible settings
receiver what equipment is hooked up to which terminal so the buttons on the remote control correspond to the components you’ve connected.
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
DVD TV
HOME MEDIA
DVR2
GALLERY
DVR1 i Pod
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use the  RECEIVER
2 Press the
SETUP
RECEIVER
button.
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the
///
buttons and screens and select menu items. Press confirm and exit the current menu.
3 Select ‘Input Setup’ from the System Setup menu.
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
4 Select the input function that you want to set up.
The default names correspond with the names next to the terminals on the rear panel (such as
GAME 1
) which, in turn, correspond with the names on
the remote control.
DVD/LD
7. Input Setup (1/2)
Input DV D Digital In [ COAX-1 ] HDMI Input [ Input-1 ] Component In [ Comp-3 ] S-Video In [ Input-1 ]
( Next )
Note
1 For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is switched off (in you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component. 2 You will have to make an SR+ cable connection from a setup in
Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display
plasma display’s remote sensor after making this connection.
Input function default and
below). In this case, you need to tell the
BD TV CTRL
TUNER
SYSTEM OFF
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PROGRAM
TV VOL
CLEAR +
10
TUNE
ST ST
ENTER
TUNE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
SELECT
CH LEVEL
CLASS
ENTER
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
RETURNRETURN
VOL
DISC
button to switch on.
on the remote control, then press
ENTER
to navigate through the
-
55.0
:Exit
-
55.0
:Finish
dB
dB
RETURN
DVD/LD
7. Input Setup (1/2)
Input DV D Digital In [ COAX-1 ] HDMI Input [ Input-1 ] Component In [ Comp-3 ] S-Video In [ Input-1 ]
( Next )
DVD/LD
DVD/LD
7. Input Setup (2/2)
( Back)
DVD/LD Input Name Rename 12V Trigger1 [ OFF ] 12V Trigger2 [ OFF ] PDP In (SR+) [ OFF ]
ENTER : Next
to
-
55.0
dB
:Finish
or
VIDEO/
-
55.0
dB
:Finish
CONTROL OUT
on page 59). Note that to control this receiver using the remote, you will have to point it at the
component.
For example, if your DVD player only has an optical output, you will need to change the function’s
Digital In
setting from optical input you’ve connected it to. The numbering (
OPT1
to 4) corresponds with the numbers beside the
inputs on the back of the receiver.
• If you change the setting to an input that has been previously assigned to another function (for example,
TV
) then the setting for that function will
automatically be switched off.
• If your component is connected via a component video cable to an input terminal other than the default, you must tell the receiver which input terminal your component is connected to, or else you may see the S-video or composite video signals
instead of the component video signals.
6 When you’re finished, select ‘Next’ to continue to the next screen.
The second screen of the Input setup has three optional settings:
Input Name
– You can choose to rename the input function for easier identification. Select do so, or
12V Trigger 1 / 2
Default
to return to the system default.
– After connecting a component to
one of the 12 volt triggers (see
on and off using the 12 volt trigger
MAIN, ZONE 2, ZONE 3
or
OFF
corresponding trigger setting to switch it on automatically along with the (main or sub) zone specified.
PDP In (SR+)
– To control certain functions on this
receiver from a plasma display, select the display input to which you’ve connected the receiver.
7 When you’re finished, press
You will return to the System Setup menu.
Setting the Video options
jack on the display to the
CONTROL IN
jack on this receiver (opposite from the
DVD/LD
COAX 1
input
(default) to the
1
Rename
to
Switching components
on page 59), select
for the
2
RETURN
.
on page 69),
Page 65
Other Settings
Input function default and possible settings
The terminals on the rear of the receiver generally correspond to the name of one of the input source functions. If you have connected components to this receiver differently from (or in addition to) the defaults below, see receiver how you’ve connected up. The dots ( possible assignments.
Input source
DVD/LD
BD OPT 2
TV/SAT OPT 1
DVR/VCR 1 OPT 3
DVR/VCR 2
VIDEO/ GAME 1
VIDEO/ GAME 2
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
(VSX-LX70)
HOME MEDIA GALLERY
(VSX-LX70)
CD
CD-R/TAPE/ MD
TUNER
PHONO
MULTI CH IN
iPod
a.With HDMI Control set to ON, assignments cannot be made (see
Control
The Input Setup menu
Digital
COAX 1
(Fixed)
COAX 2
OPT 4
on page 62).
above to tell the
Input Terminals
HDMI
(
HDMI-1
(
HDMI-2
(
HDMI-3
(
HDMI-4
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
Component
)
)
)
)
) indicate
S-Video
IN 1 IN 1
IN 2 IN 2

IN 3
(Fixed)
(Fixed)
(Fixed)
HDMI
The Other Setup menu
The Other Setup menu is where you can make customized settings to reflect how you are using the receiver.
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
HOME MEDIA
HDMI
BD TV CTRL
ZONE2/3
GALLERY
TUNER
RECEIVER
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PROGRAM
TV VOL
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use the  RECEIVER
2 Press the
SETUP
RECEIVER
button.
button to switch on.
on the remote control, then press
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the
///
buttons and
ENTER
to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press confirm and exit the current menu.
3 Select ‘Other Setup’ then press
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
-
55.0
:Exit
DVD/LD
dB
8. Other Setup
a. Multi Ch In Setup
b. ZONE Audio Setup c. SR+ Setup d. HDMI Control Setup e. OSD Adjustment
4 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:
Multi Ch In Setup
– Specifies the optional settings
for a multi-channel input.
ZONE Audio Setup
a MULTI-ZONE setup (see
SR+ Setup
– Specify how you want to control your
Pioneer plasma display (see
plasma displays
HDMI Control Setup
– Specify your volume setting for
ZONE Audio Setup
SR+ Setup for Pioneer
below).
– Synchronizes this receiver with your Pioneer component supporting HDMI Control (see
Setting the HDMI Control mode
page 63).
OSD Adjustment
– Adjust the position of the on­screen display on your TV (see below).
5 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.
CLASS
CH LEVEL
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
ENTER
TV CH
RETURN
:Return
ENTER
DISC
RETURNRETURN
VOL
to
.
-
55.0
dB
CLEAR +
10
TUNE
ST ST
TUNE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
SELECT
ENTER
below).
on
OSD Adjustment
10
65
En
Page 66
10
Other Settings
Multi Channel Input Setup
You can adjust the level of the subwoofer for a multi­channel input. Also, when the multi-channel input is selected as an input source, you can display the video images of other input sources. In the Multi Channel Input Setup, you can assign a video input to the multi-channel input.
1 Select ‘
Multi Ch In Setup
’ from the Other Setup
menu.
-
55.0
DVD/LD
8. Other Setup
a. Multi Ch In Setup
b. ZONE Audio Setup c. SR+ Setup d. HDMI Control Setup e. OSD Adjustment
2 Select the ‘
0dB
SW Input Gain
– Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level
dB
:Return
’ setting you want.
originally recorded on the source.
+10dB
– Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level
increased by 10 dB.
3 Select the ‘
DVD/LD
8a. Multi Ch In Setup
SW Input Gain 0dB
Video Input [ DVD ]
Video Input
-
55.0
dB
:Finish
’ setting you want.
When the multi-channel input is selected as an input source, you can display the video images of other input sources. The video input can be selected from the following:
VCR2
4 When you’re finished, press
DVD/LD, BD, TV/SAT, DVR/VCR1, DVR/
,
VIDEO/GAME1, VIDEO/GAME2
DVD/LD
8a. Multi Ch In Setup
SW Input Gain [ 0dB ]
Video Inpu BD
-
55.0
:Finish
dB
RETURN
.
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
ZONE Audio Setup
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see
ZONE listening
on page 56) you may need to specify your
volume setting.
MULTI-
1 Select ‘ZONE Audio Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.
DVD/LD
8. Other Setup
a. Multi Ch In Setup
b. ZONE Audio Setup
c. SR+ Setup d. HDMI Control Setup e. OSD Adjustment
-
55.0
:Return
DVD/LD
dB
8b. ZONE Audio Setup
ZONE 2 / RECSEL Setting RECSEL ZONE 2 Volume Level [ – – – ]
-
55.0
:Finish
dB
2 Select the ‘ZONE 2 / RECSEL Setting’ you want.
You can select the
ZONE 2
ZONE 2
or
RECSEL
setting.
– Sound is output from MULTI ZONE &
SOURCE ZONE2 OUT jack.
RECSEL
– Sound is output from the CD-R/TAPE OUT, DVR/VCR1 OUT or DVR/VCR2 OUT jack. For details, see
Playing a different source when recording
on
page 70.
3 Select the volume level setting.
Variable
– Use this setting if you’ve connected a
1
power amplifier in the sub room (this receiver is simply being used as a pre-amp) and you will be using this receiver’s controls to adjust the volume.
Fixed
– Use this setting if you’ve connected a fully integrated amplifier (such as another Pioneer VSX receiver) in the sub room and want to use that receiver’s volume controls. (This setting is not available if the surround back system setting is set to
ZONE 2
.)
Fixed
With the
setting, the source is sent from this receiver at maximum volume, so make sure the volume is quite low in the sub zone at first and then experiment to find the correct level.
4 When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays
Make the following settings if you have connected a Pioneer plasma display to this receiver using an SR+ cable. Note that the number of function settings available will depend on the plasma display you’ve connected.
See also on page 59 and
plasma display
1 Select ‘SR+ Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.
Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer
on page 60.
DVD/LD
8. Other Setup
a. Multi Ch In Setup b. ZONE Audio Setup
c. SR+ Setup
d. HDMI Control Setup e. OSD Adjustment
DVD/LD
-
55.0
dB
8c. SR+ Setup
PDP Volume Control OFF
Monitor Out Connect [ OFF ]
-
55.0
dB
66
En
Note
1 If you selected
ZONE 2
in the
Surround back speaker setting
:Return
on page 40, you won’t be able to change the volume level.
:Finish
Page 67
Other Settings
10
2 Select the ‘
OFF
PDP Volume Control
’ setting you want.
– The receiver does not control the volume of the
plasma display.
ON
– When the receiver is switched to one of the
inputs that use the plasma display (
DVD/LD
, for example), the volume on the plasma display is muted so only sound from the receiver is heard.
3 Assign any input source connected to the plasma display to the corresponding input number.
This matches the receiver’s input source with a numbered video input on the plasma display. For example, assign
DVD/LD
to
input-2
if you have connected the your DVD video output to video input 2 on the plasma display.
• The
Monitor Out Connect
should be set to the input that you’ve used to connect this receiver to your plasma display.
DVD/LD
8c. SR+ Setup
PDP Volume Control [ OFF ]
Monitor Out Connect OFF
4 When you’re finished, press
-
55.0
dB
:Finish
RETURN
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
OSD Adjustment
Use this feature to adjust your TV display if it seems difficult to see all the instructions on the screen.
1 Select ‘OSD Adjustment’ from the Other Setup menu.
AA
-
55.0
:Return
dB
X=0 , Y=0
[ Finish ]
A
:Cancel
A
DVD/LD
8. Other Setup
a. Multi Ch In Setup b. ZONE Audio Setup c. SR+ Setup d. HDMI Control Setup
e. OSD Adjustment
2 Use
///
to move the display field around
until you get one that you feel best suits your TV.
3 When you’re finished, press
ENTER
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
67
En
Page 68
11
Using other functions
Chapter 11:
Using other functions
Setting the Audio options
There are a number of additional sound settings you can make using the Audio Parameter menu. The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.
Important
• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the Audio Parameter menu, it is unavailable due to the current source, settings and status of the receiver.
1 Press
2 Use
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the table below for notes on this.
3 Use
See the table below for the options available for each setting.
4 Press
Setting What it does Option(s)
MCACC
(MCACC preset)
EQ
(Acoustic Calibration EQ)
S-WAVE
(Standing Wave)
DELAY
(Sound Delay)
MIDNIGHT
LOUDNESS
A PARAMETER (AUDIO PARAMETER
/
to select the setting you want to adjust.
/
to set it as necessary.
RETURN
to confirm and exit the menu.
Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory when multiple preset memories are saved. When a MCACC preset memory has been renamed, the name given is displayed.
Switches on/off the effects of EQ Pro. only for the MCACC preset memory selected. This setting is available for each MCACC preset memory.
Switches on/off the effects of Standing Wave Control only for the MCACC preset memory selected. This setting is available for each MCACC preset memory.
Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video, so the soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the picture. By adding a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound to match the presentation of the video.
Allows you to hear effective surround sound of movies at low volumes.
Used to get good bass and treble from music sources at low volumes.
M1. MEMORY 1
M6. MEMORY 6
M1. MEMORY 1
MCACC OFF
1 second = 25
frames (PAL)/
Default:
MID/LDN OFF
MIDNIGHT ON
LOUDNESS ON
).
to
Default:
ON
b
OFF
ON
OFF
0.0 to 6.0 (frames)
30 frames
(NTSC)
0.0
a
Setting
TONE
(Tone Control)
c
BASS
c
TREBLE
S.RTRV
(Sound Retriever)
DNR
(Digital Noise Reduction)
DIALOG E
(Dialog Enhance­ment)
HIBITSMP
(High Bit / High Sampling)
DUAL
(Dual Mono)
DRC
(Dynamic Range Control)
What it does Option(s)
Applies the treble and bass tone controls to a source, or bypasses them completely.
Adjusts the amount of bass. –6 to +6 (dB)
Adjusts the amount of treble. –6 to +6 (dB)
When audio data is removed during the WMA/MP3/MPEG-4 AAC compression process, sound quality often suffers from an uneven sound image. The Sound Retriever feature employs new DSP technology that helps bring CD quality sound back to compressed 2-channel audio by restoring sound pressure and smoothing jagged artifacts left over after compression.
May improve the quality of sound in a noisy source (for example, cassette or video tape with lots of background noise) when switched on.
Localizes dialog in the center channel to make it stand out from other background sounds in a TV or movie soundtrack.
Creates a wider dynamic range with digital sources like CDs or DVDs.
Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital soundtracks should be played. Dual mono is not widely used, but is sometimes necessary when two languages need to be sent to separate channels.
Adjusts the level of dynamic range for movie soundtracks optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio (you may need to use this feature when listening to surround sound at low volumes).
BYPASS
Default: 0 (dB)
Default: 0 (dB)
CH1
– Channel 1 is heard only
CH2
– Channel 2 is heard only
CH1 CH2
Both channels heard from front speakers
AUTO
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
d
OFF
MAX
MID
68
En
Page 69
Using other functions
11
Setting
LFE ATT
(LFE Attenuate)
SACD
e
GAIN
HDMI
(HDMI Audio)
A. DELAY
(Auto delay)
C. WIDTH
(Center Width) (Applicable only when using a center speaker)
DIMENSION
PANORAMA
C. IMAGE
(Center Image) (Applicable only when using a center speaker)
EFFECT
g
h
What it does Option(s)
Some Dolby Digital and DTS audio sources include ultra-low bass tones. Set the LFE attenuator as necessary to prevent the ultra-low bass tones from distorting the sound from the speakers. The LFE is not limited when set to 0 dB, which is the recommended value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB, –15 dB or –20 dB, the LFE is limited by the respective degree. When OFF is selected, no sound is output from the LFE channel.
Brings out detail in SACDs by maximizing the dynamic range (during digital processing).
Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out of this receiver (
amp
) or
through
display. When THROUGH is selected, no sound is output from this receiver.
This feature automatically corrects the audio-to-video delay between components connected with an HDMI cable. The audio delay time is set depending on the operational status of the display connected with an HDMI cable. The video delay time is automatically adjusted according
to the audio delay time.
Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the center channel between the front right and left speakers, making it sound wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings).
g
Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to back, making the sound more distant (minus settings), or more forward (positive settings).
g
Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a ‘wraparound’ effect.
Adjusts the center image to create a wider stereo effect with vocals. Adjust the effect from 0 (all center channel sent to front right and left speakers) to 10 (center channel sent to the center speaker only).
Sets the effect level for the currently selected Advanced Surround mode (each mode can be set separately).
to a TV or plasma
f
–5dB/ –10dB/
–15dB/ –20dB/
0 to 6 (dB)
Default: 0 (dB)
THROUGH
Default:
–3 to +3
Default:
Default:
10 to 90
0dB
OFF
AMP
OFF
ON
0 to 7
OFF
ON
0 to 10
a.When
MCACC OFF
deactivated. b.When
EQ OFF
when a MCACC preset memory is selected. c.The adjustment can be made only when d.The initially set
MAX
or
MID
e.You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD discs, but if the sound distorts, it is best to switch the gain setting back to f. This feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio/video synchronizing capability (‘lip-sync’) for HDMI or HDMI Control. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set
A. DELAY
to about the lip-sync feature of your display, contact the manufacturer directly. g.Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music/ Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode. h.Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Music mode.
is selected, all MCACC preset memories become
is selected, the MCACC indicator does not light even
TONE
AUTO
is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select
for signals other than Dolby TrueHD.
OFF
and adjust the delay time manually. For more details
is set to ON.
0
dB.
Setting the Video options
There are a number of additional picture settings you can make using the Video Parameter menu. The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.
Important
• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the Video Parameter menu, it is unavailable due to the current source, setting and status of the receiver.
1 Press
2 Use
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the
3
table below for notes on this.
3 Use
See the table below for the options available for each setting.
4 Press
0
3
Setting
V. CONV
(Digital Video Conversion)
BRIGHT
(Brightness)
CONTRAST
HUE
CHROMA
V PARAMETER (VIDEO PARAMETER
/
to select the setting you want to adjust.
/
to set it as necessary.
1
RETURN
to confirm and exit the menu.
What it does Option(s)
Converts video signals for output from the
MONITOR OUT
all video types.
Adjusts the overall brightness. –10 to +10
Adjusts the contrast between light and dark.
Adjusts the red/green balance. –10 to +10
Adjusts saturation from dull to bright.
jacks for
).
ON
OFF
Default:
–10 to +10
Default:
Default:
–10 to +10
Default:
0
0
0
0
Note
1 Brightness, Contrast, Hue, Chroma, Resolution and Aspect can be set for each input source.
69
En
Page 70
11
Using other functions
Setting
a
RES
(Resolution)
ASP
(Aspect)
What it does Option(s)
Specifies the output resolution of the video signal (when analog video input signals are output at the HDMI OUT connector, select this according to the resolution of your monitor and the images you wish to watch). When
AUTO
is selected, the resolution is automatically selected depending on the capability of the display connected to this receiver.
Specifies the aspect ratio when analog video input signals are output at the HDMI output. Make your desired settings while checking each setting on your display (if the image doesn’t match your monitor
AUTO
PURE
480p/576p
720p
1080i
1080p
THROUGH
(none)
NORMAL
ZOOM
For more information about video connections, see
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other video sources
1 Select the source you want to record.
Use the input source buttons (or
type, cropping or black bands appear).
a.When a resolution value is selected in this setting and the analog signals input are converted and output as HDMI signals, images may not appear depending on the video signals being input or the resolution of your monitor. Also, depending on the source component or the monitor being used, the output resolution may be different from this setting. Conversion to 1080p is available only for the input signals of 480i/576i/ 480p/576p.
2 Prepare the source you want to record.
Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, DVD etc.
3 Prepare the recorder.
Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the recording device and set the recording levels.
Making an audio or a video recording
You can make an audio or a video recording from the built-in tuner, or from an audio or video source
connected to the receiver (such as a CD player or TV). To use this feature, you must set
RECSEL
in the
Audio Setup
ZONE Audio Setup
on page 66.
ZONE2/RECSEL
. For details, see
to
ZONE
Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if you are unsure how to do this. Most video recorders set the audio recording level automatically—check the component’s instruction manual if you’re unsure.
1
4 Start recording, then start playback of the source component.
Keep in mind you can’t make a digital recording from an analog source or vice-versa, so make sure the components you are recording to/from are hooked up in the same way (see
Connecting your equipment
on
page 12 for more on connections). Since the video converter is not available when making
recordings (from the video the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder as you used to connect your video source (the one you want to record) to this receiver. For example, you must
OUT
jacks) make sure to use
Playing a different source when recording
Using this receiver, it’s possible to listen to a different
analog source than the one you’re recording. connect your recorder using S-video if your source has also been connected using S-video.
on page 16.
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
HDMI
BD TV CTRL
ZONE2/3
TUNER
RECEIVER
INPUT SELECT
).
to select the
• If necessary, press
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
SIGNAL SELECT
input signal corresponding to the source component (see
Choosing the input signal
on page 32 for more
on this).
Tip
• If you have a digital recorder connected to the
DIGITAL OUT1 (ZONE3
switched on (see
) digital output and
ZONE 3
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls
page 58), you can also select a different input source for this output while
AUDIO VIDEO
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
PHONES
(ST) (ST)
ENTER
(TUNE)
SETUP
RETURN
ZONE 3
TUNER EDITSPEAKERS BAND
USB
SETUP MIC
shows in the display.
MULTI – ZONE &
SIGNAL
SOURCE/REC SEL
CONTROL ON/OFF
MCACC
SELECT
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO L RAUDIO
SB ch
PROCESSING
STEREO/ F.S.SURR
is
on
70
En
Note
1• The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the tone controls, for example), and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal.
• Some digital sources are copy-protected, and can only be recorded in analog.
• Some video sources are copy-protected. These cannot be recorded.
Page 71
Using other functions
11
1 During recording, press the button on the front panel until
1
display.
REC SELECT CONTROL RECOUT
shows in the
• You can check the remaining sleep time at any time
2 While RECOUT shows in the display, use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source you want to record.
The default,
RECOUT SOURCE
currently listening to (as in
recording
above).
, records the source you’re
Making an audio or a video
Dimming the display
You can choose between four brightness levels for the front panel display. Note that when selecting sources, the display automatically brightens for a few seconds.
• Note that the setting you make here is stored in memory, even if you switch off the receiver, so if you want to record a different input source later, you must do so with
RECOUT SOURCE
3 After
RECOUT
the input source you want to listen to.
REC SELECT
, or by selecting
.
disappears from the display, select
Press of the front panel display.
This will be heard from the main system without affecting your recording.
2
Switching the speaker impedance
We recommend using speakers of 8 Ω with this system,
Reducing the level of an analog signal
The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog signal when it’s too strong. You can use this if you find the that the
hear distortion in the sound.
Press
OVER
indicator is lights often, or you can
D.ACCESS
ANALOG ATT
3
SLEEP
+
SR
DIMMER
GENRE
ANALOG ATT
CLASS
to switch the input attenuator
but it is possible to switch the impedance setting if you plan to use speakers with a 6
1 With the receiver in standby, press
ON
2 Select using
on or off.
by pressing cycle through the sleep options again.
while holding down the
/
SLEEP
DIMMER
SPEAKER
.
once. Pressing repeatedly will
4
D.ACCESS
SLEEP
+
SR
DIMMER
GENRE
ANALOG ATT
CLASS
repeatedly to change the brightness
impedance rating.
STANDBY/
SETUP
button.
using
/
, then select
8
or
6
SPEAKER 6 Ω – Use this setting if your speakers are
rated at 6
.
SPEAKER 8 Ω – Use this setting if your speakers are
rated at 8
or more.
Using the sleep timer
The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without worrying about the receiver being left on all night. Use the remote control to set the sleep timer.
SLEEP
+
SR
Press
SLEEP
repeatedly to set the sleep time.
30 min 60 min
Off
Note
1 If
RECOUT
ZONE 3
2 If 3 The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or when using the Stream Direct modes. 4 You can also switch off the sleep timer simply by switching off the receiver.
does not appear in the display, you may have to switch
or off (the
RECOUT SOURCE
MULTI-ZONE
indicator disappears). See
is selected, changing the input source likewise changes the input source used for your recording.
DIMMER
GENRE
ANALOG ATT
90 min
ZONE 2
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls
off by pressing
MULTI ZONE & SOURCE ON/OFF
on page 58 for more on this.
and selecting either
71
En
Page 72
11
Using other functions
Checking your system settings
Use the status display screen to check your current settings for features such as surround back channel processing and your current MCACC preset.
AUDIO SUBTITLE
HDD
DVD
DISP
CH
SIGNAL SEL
THX
PHASE
T.DISP
SBch
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
CH
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
1
PHOTO
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
1 Press
STATUS
to check the system settings.
These appear on the front panel display. The front panel display shows each of the following
settings for two seconds each:
Input source
Surround Back Processing
2 When you’re finished, press
MCACC preset
ZONE 2 / REC SEL
ZONE 3
HDMI Control
STATUS
again to
switch off the display.
Resetting the system
Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s settings to the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this.
1 Switch the receiver into standby.
SETUP
2 While holding down the panel, press
The display shows
3 Press the
4 Select
STANDBY/ON
RESET NO
ENTER
RESET
using
button on the front panel.
/
button on the front panel.
The display shows
5 Press
OK
ENTER
appears in the display to indicate that the receiver
RESET? OK
to confirm.
has been reset to the factory default settings.
• Note that all settings will be saved, even if the receiver is unplugged.
button on the front
.
.
, then press the
.
ENTER
Default system settings
Setting Default
HDMI Audio Amp
Digital Video Conversion On
Speakers A
Surround Back System Normal (default)
Speaker System Front SMALL
Center SMALL
Surr. SMALL
SB SMALLx2
SW YES
Crossover 80 Hz
X-Curve OFF
THX Audio Setting 0–0.3m
Inputs
See
Input function default and possible settings
MULTI-ZONE
Zone 2 Volume Type Variable
Zone 2 Volume –60
SR+
SR+ Control On/Off OFF
SR+ Volume Control On/Off OFF
Monitor Out OFF
DSP
MCACC Position Memory M1: MEMORY 1
Surround back channel Processing
Phase Control ON
Full Band Phase Control OFF
Sound Retriever OFF
Sound Delay 0 frame
Dual Mono CH1
DRC AUTO
SACD Gain 0 dB
LFE Attenuate 0 dB
Auto delay OFF
Digital Safety OFF
on page 65.
ON
72
En
Note
1 If the Pure Direct mode is switched on, some settings above will show
OFF
, even though they are on.
Page 73
Using other functions
11
Setting
Effect Level ExtendedStereo 90
Other modes 50
2
PL II Music Options Center Width 3
Dimension 0
Panorama OFF
Neo:6 Options Center Image 3
All Inputs Listening Mode (2 ch) AUTO SURROUND
Listening Mode (x ch) AUTO SURROUND
Listening Mode (HP) STEREO
See also
Setting the Audio options
settings.
MCACC
Channel level (M1–M6) 0 dB
Speaker Distance (M1–M6) 3.00 m
Standing Wave (M1–M6)
EQ Data (M1–M6) All channels/bands 0 dB
EQ Wide Trim (M1–M6) 0.0 dB
on page 68 for other default DSP
Standing Wave On/ Off
ATT 0 dB
SWch Wide Trim 0.0
Default
ON
73
En
Page 74
12
Controlling the rest of your system
Chapter 12:
Controlling the rest of your system
4 Use
/
to select the first letter of the brand name
ENTER
.
/
to select the manufacturer’s name from
ENTER
.
/
to select the proper code from the list,
DVD 020
). If there is more than one, start with
2
SOURCE. If it doesn’t
Programming signals
below).
to confirm.
Setting the remote to control other components
Most components can be assigned to one of the input source buttons (such as component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the remote.
However, there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote control will not work for the model that you are using.
If you can’t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control, you can still teach the remote individual commands from another remote control (see
controls
Programming signals from other remote
below).
Note
• You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing
RECEIVER
. To go back a step, press
• After one minute of inactivity, the remote automatically exits the operation.
DVD/LD
or CD) using the
RETURN
.
of your component then press
This should be the manufacturer’s name (for example, P for Pioneer).
5 Use the list then press
6 Use then try using this remote with your component.
The code should start with the component type (for example,
the first one. To try out the remote control, switch the component on or
off (into standby) by pressing seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there is one).
• If you can’t find or properly enter a preset code, you can still teach the remote individual commands from another remote control (see
from other remote controls
7 If your component is controlled successfully, press
ENTER
The remote LCD display shows OK.
74
En
Selecting preset codes directly
Programming signals from other remote controls
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
DVD TV
HOME MEDIA
DVR2
GALLERY
DVR1 i Pod
1 While pressing the
BD TV CTRL
TUNER
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
The remote LCD display shows
2 Use
/
to select
PRESET
D.ACCESS
CLEAR +
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU
ST ST
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PROGRAM
TV VOL
button, press
SETUP
then press
10
TUNE
TUNE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
SELECT
ENTER
.
TV CH
CH LEVEL
CLASS
DISC
ENTER
V PARAMETER MENU T.EDIT
RETURNRETURN
VOL
ENTER
SETUP
.
3 Press the input source button for the component you want to control then press
ENTER
.
The LCD on the remote displays the component you want to control (for example
Note
1 You can’t assign the 2• When using a Pioneer HDD recorder, please select PIONEER DVR 487, 488, 489 or 493.
• When using a Pioneer plasma display released prior to summer 2005, please select preset codes 637 or 660.
3 The remote can store about 200 preset codes (this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only). 4• You can’t assign the RECEIVER, TUNER, iPod or HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-LX70 only) buttons.
TV CONTROL buttons (TV, TV VOL +/–, TV CH +/– and INPUT SELECT) can only be learned after selecting TV CTRL.
DVD
RECEIVER, TUNER, iPod or HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-LX70 only) buttons.
or TV).
1
If the preset code for your component is not available, or the available preset codes do not operate correctly, you can program signals from the remote control of another component. This can also be used to program additional operations (buttons not covered in the presets) after
assigning a preset code.
1 While pressing the
3
RECEIVER
The remote LCD display shows
.
2 Use
/
to select
LEARNING
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the component you want to control (for example
3 Press the input source button for the component you want to control then press
PRES KEY
shows in the LCD display.
button, press
SETUP
.
then press
DVD
or TV).
ENTER
.
4
SETUP
ENTER
.
.
Page 75
Controlling the rest of your system
CLEAR
PROGRAM
12
4 Point the two remote controls towards each other then press the button that will be doing the learning on
7 Press and hold the
RECEIVER
button for a couple of
seconds to exit and store the operation(s).
this receiver’s remote control.
PRES KEY
to accept a signal.
• The remote controls should be 3 cm to 5 cm apart.
5 Press the corresponding button on the other remote control that is sending (teaching) the signal to this receiver’s remote control.
For example, if you want to learn the playback control signal, press and hold
show If for some reasons the operation hasn’t been learned the
LCD will display
KEY
button as you vary the distance between the two remotes, until the LCD display shows Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be learned from other remote controls.
available are shown below (with the exception of the TV controls, a combination of also be learned):
starts flashing to indicate the remote is ready
ANALOG
ATT
DISC
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
3 cm to 5 cm
briefly. The LCD display will
OK
if the operation has been learned.
ERROR
briefly and then display
SYSTEM OFF
CLASS
BD TV CTRL
GENRE
DIMMER
TUNER
CD-R
GALLERY
INPUT
+
SELECT
HOME MEDIA
SLEEP
SR
CD
D.ACCESS
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
RECEIVER SOURCE
1
PRES
again. If this happens, keep pressing the (teaching)
2
OK
.
3
The buttons
SHIFT
and these buttons can
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
Erasing one of the remote control button settings
This erases one of the buttons you have programmed and restores the button to the factory default.
1 While pressing the
The remote LCD display shows
2 Use
/
to select
RECEIVER
ERASE
then press
button, press
SETUP
.
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the component corresponding to the button setting to be erased.
3 Press the input source button corresponding to the command to be erased then press
The LCD display flashes
PRES KEY
ENTER
.
4 Press and hold the button to be erased for two seconds.
The LCD display shows OK or
NO CODE
button has been erased.
5 Repeat step 4 to erase other buttons.
6 Press and hold the
RECEIVER
button for a couple of
seconds when you’re done.
Resetting the remote control presets
This will erase all preset remote control preset codes and programmed buttons.
CD
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER TOP MENU
BAND
SETUP
PROGRAM
CD-R
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
i Pod
TUNER
SLEEP
DIMMER
+
GENRE
SR
CLEAR +
10
TUNE
ST ST
ENTER
TUNE
TV CONTROL
BD TV CTRL
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
CLASS
CH
ENTER
LEVEL
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
HDMI
RETURN
ANALOG ATT
DISC
1 While pressing the
The remote LCD display shows
2 Use
RESET
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
TV VOL
TV/DTV
MPX
AUDIO SUBTITLE
PHOTO
STATUS
SIGNAL SEL
SELECT
VOL
INFO
REC
MUTE
REC STOP
JUKEBOX
HDD
DVD
DISP
CH
CH
T.DISP
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
3 Press and hold
The LCD shows OK to confirm the remote presets have been erased.
Confirming preset codes
Use this feature to check which preset code is assigned
/
to select
flashes in the LCD display.
RECEIVER
RESET
button, press
SETUP
.
then press
ENTER for about two seconds
to an input source button.
6 To program additional signals for the current component repeat steps 4 and 5.
To program signals for another component, exit and repeat steps 1 through 5.
1 While pressing the
RECEIVER
The remote LCD display shows
2 Use
/
to select READ ID then press
button, press
SETUP
.
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the input source button you want to check.
Note
1 Note that interference from TVs or other devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal. 2• Some commands from other remote controls cannot be learned, but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or farther apart.
• If the remote LCD shows you’re not using to free up more memory (note that some signals may take more memory than others). 3 Note that the number key decimal button (+10/D.ACCESS) may not be learned with some components.
FULL
, it means the memory is full. See
Erasing one of the remote control button settings
below to erase a programmed button
SETUP
ENTER
.
.
to confirm the
SETUP
ENTER
.
.
SETUP
ENTER
.
.
.
.
75
En
Page 76
12
Controlling the rest of your system
3 Press the button of the component for which you want to check the preset code, then press
ENTER
.
The brand name and preset code appears in the display for three seconds.
Renaming input source names
You can customize the names that appear on the remote LCD when you select an input source (for example, you could change the name of
1 While pressing the
The remote LCD display shows
2 Use
/
to select
DVR 1
RECEIVER
RENAME
to
HDD/DVR
button, press
SETUP
.
then press
).
SETUP
ENTER
.
.
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the button of the input source you want to rename.
3 Press the input source button you want to rename then press
4 Use
/
ENTER
to select
.
NAME EDT
then press
ENTER
.
To reset the button to its original (default) name, select
NAME RST
above.
5 Edit the name of the input source in the remote control LCD, pressing
Use
/
to change the character and
ENTER
when you’re finished.
/
to move forward/back a position. The name can be up to eight characters (the possible characters are listed below).
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789 \ / * + –
[space]
Direct function
• Default setting:
You can use the direct function feature to control one component using the remote control while at the same time, using your receiver to playback a different component. This could let you, for example, use the remote control to set up and listen to a CD on the receiver and then use the remote control to rewind a tape in your VCR while you continue to listen to your CD player.
When direct function is on, any component you select (using the input source buttons) will be selected by both the receiver and the remote control. When you turn direct function off, you can operate the remote control without
affecting the receiver.
1 While pressing the
The remote LCD display shows
ON
1
RECEIVER
button, press
SETUP
.
SETUP
.
2 Use
/
to select
DIRECT F
then press
ENTER
.
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the button of the input source you want to control.
3 Press the input source button for the component you want to control then press
/
4 Use press
to switch direct function ON or
ENTER
.
ENTER
.
OFF
then
The LCD shows OK to confirm the setting.
Multi Operation and System Off
The Multi Operation feature allows you to program a series of up to 5 commands for the components in your system. For example, you could turn on your TV, turn on your DVD player and start playing the loaded DVD using only two buttons on the remote control.
Similar to multi operations, System Off allows you to use one button to stop and switch off a series of components
in your system at the same time.
Programming a multi-operation or a shutdown sequence
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
GALLERY
BD TV CTRL
TUNER
ENTER
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
MULTI OP
.
CODE EDT
DVD TV
HOME MEDIA
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
1 While pressing the
The remote LCD display shows
2 Use
/
to select
menu and press
If you selected Multi Operation
the remote prompts you for an input source button.
If you selected System Off (SYS OFF), go to step 4.
3 Press the input source button for the component that will start the multi-operation then press
For example, if you want to start the sequence by switching on your DVD player, press DVD.
4 Use
/
to select
To erase any previously stored multi-operations (or shutdown sequences) select CODE ERS above.
2
CLEAR +
10
TUNE
ST ST
ENTER
TUNE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
SELECT
.
SYS OFF
CH LEVEL
CLASS
ENTER
V PARAMETER MENU T.EDIT
VOL
DISC
RETURNRETURN
SETUP
from the
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PROGRAM
TV VOL
button, press
SETUP
or
(MULTI OP), the LCD on
ENTER
then press
ENTER
.
.
.
76
En
Note
1 You can’t use direct function with the TV CTRL function. 2• Before Multi Operation and System Off will work correctly, you must setup the remote to work with your TV and other components (see Setting the remote to control other components on page 74 for more on this).
• Some units may take some time to power up, in which case multiple operations may not be possible.
• Power on and off commands only work with components that have a standby mode.
Page 77
Controlling the rest of your system
PROGRAM
T.DISP
PHOTO
5 Use
/
press
If this is the first command in the sequence, select
CODE
the sequence.
6 If necessary, press the input source button for the component whose command you want to input.
This is only necessary if the command is for a new component (input source).
7 Select the button for the command you want to input.
The following remote control commands can be selected:
• You don’t need to program the receiver to switch on or off. This is done automatically.
With Pioneer components
• program the power to switch off in a shutdown sequence (except DVD recorders);
• program the power to switch on if it’s the source component selected in step 3;
• program a Pioneer TV or monitor to switch on if the input function (selected in step 2) has video input terminals;
These take priority in multi operations (not shutdown).
8 Repeat steps 5–7 to program a sequence of up to five commands.
9 When you’re finished, use from the menu and press
You will return to the remote control
* EXIT *
to select a command in the sequence then
ENTER
.
1ST
. Otherwise, simply choose the next command in
PRES KEY
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
DVD TV
HOME MEDIA
DVR2
GALLERY
DVR1
i Pod
SLEEP
+
SR
D.ACCESS
CLEAR +
10
A PARAMETER TOP MENU
TUNE
ST ST
BAND
ENTER
SETUP
TUNE
PROGRAM
TV CONTROL
flashes after you press
SYSTEM OFF
HDMI
BD TV CTRL
ZONE2/3
TUNER
RECEIVER
ANALOG
DIMMER
ATT
GENRE
TV VOL
DISC
TV/DTV
MPX
AUDIO SUBTITLE
PHOTO
STATUS
CH LEVEL
CLASS
ENTER
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
RETURN
TV CONTROL
INPUT
SELECT
REC
DISP
SIGNAL SEL
ENTER
TV CH
VOL
INFO
MUTE
REC STOP
JUKEBOX
HDD
DVD
CH
CH
T.DISP
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
, you don’t need to:
/
ENTER
to select
.
SETUP
EDITEXIT
menu. Select
again to exit.
.
Using multi operations
You can start multi operations with the receiver switched on, or in standby.
PHOTO
T.DISP
SIGNAL SEL
THX
PHASE
RECEIVER
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
1 Press MULTI OPE. MULTI OP
2
flashes in the display.
Press
an input source button that has been set up
with a multi operation.
The receiver switches on (if it was in standby) and the programmed multi operation is performed automatically.
Using System off
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
BD TV CTRL
HDMI
DVD TV
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
SIGNAL SEL
THX
PHASE
RECEIVER
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
1 Press MULTI OPE. MULTI OP
2 Press
flashes in the display.
SOURCE
.
The command sequence you programmed will run, then
1
all Pioneer components will switch off
, followed by this
receiver.
Controls for TVs
This remote control can control components after entering the proper codes or teaching the receiver the commands (see
components
source buttons to select the component.
Setting the remote to control other
on page 74 for more on this). Use the input
12
Note
1 In order to avoid accidently switching off a DVD recorder that is currently recording, no DVD recorder power off codes are sent.
77
En
Page 78
12
Controlling the rest of your system
• The
TV CONTROL
dedicated to control the TV assigned to the button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the
TV CTRL
button.
Button(s) Function Components
TV
INPUT SELECT
TV CH +/–
TV VOL +/–
SOURCESwitches the TV or CATV between
AUDIO
SUBTITLE (SHIFT+ DISP)
GUIDE
DISP
RETURN
Number buttons
+10
ENTER/ DISC
MENU
///
&
ENTER
TOP MENU
Press to switch the component assigned to the button on or off.
Switches the TV input. (Not possible with all models.)
Selects channels. Cable TV/Satellite
Adjust the TV volume. Cable TV/Satellite
standby and on. Use to choose the ‘A’ commands
on a Satellite TV menu. Use to choose the RED/B
commands on a Satellite TV/TV menu.
Use to choose the CYAN/E commands on a Satellite TV/TV menu.
Use to choose the GREEN/C commands on a Satellite TV/TV menu.
Use to choose the YELLOW/D commands on a Satellite TV/TV menu.
Use to switch audio tracks. Satellite TV/TV Use to return to the previously
selected channel.
Use as the navigating.
Switches Use to display the channel
information. Use to select Use to select a specific TV
channel.
button Use to add a decimal point when
selecting a specific TV channel. Use to enter a channel. Cable TV/Satellite
Select the menu screen. Cable TV/Satellite
Press to select or adjust and navigate items on the menu screen.
Switches
buttons on the remote control are
TV CTRL
Cable TV/Satellite
TV CTRL
GUIDE
TEXT OFF
RETURN
TEXT ON
button for
for TVs. TV
or
EXIT
for TVs. TV
TV/TV
Cable TV/Satellite TV/TV
TV/TV
TV/TV Cable TV/Satellite
TV/TV Satellite TV
Satellite TV/TV
Satellite TV/TV
Satellite TV/TV
Satellite TV/TV
Cable TV/Satellite TV/TV
Cable TV/Satellite TV/TV
Cable TV/TV
. Satellite TV/TV
Cable TV/Satellite TV/TV
Satellite TV/TV
TV/TV
TV/TV Cable TV/Satellite
TV/TV
Controls for other components
This remote control can control these components after entering the proper codes or teaching the receiver the commands (see
components
source buttons to select the component.
Button (s)
SOURCEPress to switch the component
REC
(
SHIFT+)
REC STOP
(
SHIFT+)
JUKEBOX
(
SHIFT+)
Number buttons
+10
button Selects tracks higher than 10. (For
Setting the remote to control other
on page 74 for more on this). Use the input
Function Components
between standby and on.
Press to return to the start of the current track or chapter. Repeated presses skips to the start of previous tracks or chapters.
Press to advance to the start of the next track or chapter. Repeated presses skips to the start of following tracks or chapters.
Pause playback or recording. CD/MD/CD-R/
Start playback. CD/MD/CD-R/
Hold down for fast forward playback.
Hold down for fast reverse playback.
Stops playback. CD/MD/CD-R/
Starts recording. MD/CD-R/DVR
Stops recording. DVR player
Switches to the Jukebox feature. DVR player
Directly access tracks on a program source.
Use the number buttons to navigate the on-screen display.
example, press select track 13.)
+10
then 3 to
CD/MD/CD-R/ DVD/LD/BD/DVR player/VCR/ Cassette deck
CD/MD/CD-R/ DVD/LD/BD player
CD/MD/CD-R/ DVD/LD/BD player
DVD/LD/BD/DVR player/VCR/ Cassette deck
DVD/LD/BD/DVR player/VCR/ Cassette deck
CD/MD/CD-R/ DVD/LD/BD/DVR player/VCR/ Cassette deck
CD/MD/CD-R/ DVD/LD/BD/DVR player/VCR/ Cassette deck
DVD/LD/BD/DVR player/VCR/ Cassette deck
player/VCR/ Cassette deck
CD/MD/CD-R/ LD/BD player/ VCR
DVD/DVR player
CD/MD/CD-R/LD player/VCR
78
En
Page 79
Controlling the rest of your system
V
O
L O
D B
12
Button (s)
ENTER/ DISC
Function Components
Chooses the disc. Multiple CD
Use as the
Displays the setup screen for DVR players.
ENTER
Changes sides of the LD. LD player
TOP MENU
Displays the disc ‘top’ menu of a
DVD player.
MENU
Displays menus concerning the
current DVD or DVR you are using.
ENTER
/
///
&
ENTER
GUIDE
CH +/–
AUDIO
SUBTITLE (SHIFT+ DISP)
SHIFT+ AUDIO
DISP
HDD (SHIFT+
Pauses the tape. Cassette deck Stops the tape. Cassette deck Starts playback. Cassette deck Fast rewinds/fast forwards the
tape. Navigates DVD menu/options. DVD/BD/DVR
Press to access the DVD player setup screen or Home Menu.
Selects channels. VCR/DVD/DVR
Changes the audio language or channel.
Displays/changes the subtitles on multilingual DVDs.
Switches to the VCR controls when using a VCR/DVD/HDD recorder.
Press to display information. DVD/BD/DVR
Switches to the hard disk controls when using a DVD/HDD recorder.
CH–)
DVD (SHIFT+
Switches to the DVD controls when using a DVD/HDD recorder.
CH+)
player
button. VCR/DVD/BD
player DVR player
DVD/BD/DVR player
DVD/BD/DVR player
Cassette deck
player DVD/BD/DVR
player
player DVD/BD/DVR
player DVD/BD/DVR
player
VCR/DVD/DVR player
player DVR player
DVR player
Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor
Many Pioneer components have SR which can be used to link components together so that you can use just the remote sensor of one component. When you use a remote control, the control signal is
passed along the chain to the appropriate component.
Important
• Note that if you use this feature,
also have at least one set of analog audio, video or HDMI jacks connected
to another component for
grounding purposes.
1 Decide which component you want to use the remote sensor of.
When you want to control any component in the chain, this is the remote sensor at which you’ll point the corresponding remote control.
2 Connect the to the
CONTROL IN
CONTROL OUT
jack of another Pioneer component.
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the connection.
MULTI-ZONE
OPTICAL
& SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
1
IN (TV/
SAT
2
IN (BD)
3
IN (
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN (
CD-R
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
IN (
DVD/
)
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
(CD)
)
)
)
1
1
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
MU & S
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
HDMI
1
IN
1
CONTROL
IN
2
IN
IN
OUT
2
IN
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
3
IN
B
P
4
PR
2
4
IN
2
IN
Y
(BD)
B
P
OUT
PR
(
VIDE
41
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT
CONTROL
( (
IN OUT
CONTROL
jacks
1
make sure that you
jack of that component
F F O
CE
M E
UR
T S
O
Y
S
S
T
G
N
/3
O
R
L
2
T
E
CO
A
M
T
V
N
I
A
A
E
TV
OO
C
R
E R
2
T
C
1 C UT
S I
EO
O
O E
I
D
L
L
D
D
R
NP
I
E
DE
I
E
S
E
I
U
V
RA
S
S
V
O
R
V
N
N
A
N
E
E
M
T
L
R
U
L
I
E
X
DE
T
E
L
R
I
E
T
C
S
N
D
V
U
R
M
M
H
E
E
T
.
E
M
C
I
E
T
V
D
R
V
T
I
T
R
A
-
D
d
S
D
CE
N
L
C
ST
Po
E
A
i
R
B
VO
P
E
E
T
Y
E
R
L
U
D
S
D
+
O
C
M
2
R
R
1
M
L
R
S
E
H
DV
E
R
V
E
T
O
C
N
M
V
D
N
R
EO
R
H
DVD
0
U
O
E
D
R
R
T
T
1
C
F
E
TV
U
+
N
S
N
E
T
S
I
T
R
S
N
OP
S
.
O
C
E
E
U
T
V
E
V
C
C
T
T
S
R
D
T
C
E
I T T
DT
C
S
D
V
A
U
A
D
E C U
M
.
T
D
N
R
Y
D.
E
S
P
A
h
E
R
H
H
D
L
c
R
N
C
R
O
C
E I
M
B
E
A
G
U
S
S
PA
D
R
P
N
C
TE
E
N
E
P
V
O
A
L
A
M
AC
U
T
C
A
T
T
L
C
I
S
T
V
L
E
E
T
T
O
E
M
S
D
V
D
I
S
L
V
R
UB
U
A
T
E
S
X
G
N
E
S
H
G
X
I
A
V
T
S
P
I
O I
M
PH
E
S D
P
O
IS
S
U
E
C
I
TU D
A
E
A
OP I
T
R
T
T
S
L
F I
U
H
M
S
CONTROL
IN OUT
3 Continue the chain in the same way for as many components as you have.
Note
1• If you want to control all your components using this receiver’s remote control, refer to If you have connected a remote control to the
• See
Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display
CONTROL IN
jack (using a mini-plug cable), you won’t be able to control this unit using the remote sensor.
on page 59 if you are connecting a Pioneer plasma display.
Setting the remote to control other components
on page 74.
79
En
Page 80
13
Additional information
Chapter 13:
Additional information
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work.
Power
Symptom
The power does not turn on. • Make sure that the power cable is plugged in to an active power outlet.
The receiver suddenly switches off or the Phase Control indicator blinks.
During loud playback the power suddenly switches off.
The unit does not respond when the buttons are pressed.
AMP ERR
blinks in the display, then the power automatically switches off. The and the power does not turn on.
FAN STOP
then the power automatically switches off.
OVERHEAT
then the power automatically switches off.
MCACC
blinks in the display,
blinks in the display
Remedy
• Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.
• Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another set of wires. If so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are no stray strands.
• The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.
• Turn down the volume.
• Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the
• Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down the
STANDBY/ON
to select off even with features may be unavailable.
• Try switching the receiver off then back on again.
• Try disconnecting the power cable, then connect again.
• The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on. Contact a Pioneer authorized independent service company for help.
blinks
• Something is obstructing the fan. Remove the obstruction and try switching the receiver back on. If the fan is still not working, or you can't remove the object, unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.
• The fan is malfunctioning. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.
• Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back on.
to set this receiver to the standby mode. Use
D.SAFETY 1
or
D.SAFETY 2
D.SAFETY 2
switched on, turn down the volume. With
(select
Manual MCACC setup
D.SAFETY OFF
SETUP
button on the front panel, press 
/
to select
to deactivate this feature). If the power switches
D.SAFETY 1
on page 40.
D.SAFETY
or
D.SAFETY 2
, and then use
on, some
/
80
En
No sound
Symptom
No sound is output when an input source is selected. No sound output from the front speakers.
Remedy
• Check the volume, mute setting (press
• Make sure the correct input source is selected.
• Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.
• Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press you won’t be able to hear any other signal format.
• Check that the source component is connected properly (see
• Check that the speakers are connected properly (see
MUTE
) and speaker setting (press
SIGNAL SELECT
Connecting the speakers
SPEAKERS
). Note that when
Connecting your equipment
).
on page 19).
PCM
is selected,
on page 12).
Page 81
Additional information
13
Symptom
No sound from the surround or center speakers.
No sound from surround back speakers.
No sound from subwoofer. • Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume turned up.
No sound from one speaker. • Check the speaker connection (see
Sound is produced from analog components, but not from digital ones (DVD, LD, CD-ROM etc.).
No sound is output or a noise is output when Dolby Digital/DTS software is played back.
Remedy
• Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance mode isn’t selected; select one of the surround listening modes (see
• Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see
• Check the channel level settings (see
• Check the speaker connections (see
• Check that the surround back speakers are set to
• Make sure surround back processing is set to page 32).
• If the source is Dolby Surround EX or DTS ES with no flag to indicate 6.1 compatibility, then with surround back processing set to set to
SBch ON
• If the source does not have 6.1 playback channels, make sure that surround back processing is set to
ON
and a surround mode is selected (see
• Check the speaker connections (see speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the left channel speaker terminal.
• If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.
• Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is
• The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the characteristics of your other speakers (see
• If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change your speaker settings to Front:
SMALL
• Check that the LFE channel is not set to page 68).
• Check the speaker level settings (see
• Check the speaker level settings (see
• Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see
• The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced effect listening mode, you may be able to create the missing channel (see
• Check that the input signal type is set to
• Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is connected to (see
The Input Setup menu
• Check the digital output settings on the source component.
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are not selected. Select any other input source.
• Check that your DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.
• Check the digital output settings of your DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal output is set to On.
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.
SBch Auto
(see
Using surround back channel processing
Speaker Setting
/ Subwoofer:
on page 48)
YES
, or Front:
on page 64).
Listening in surround sound
Channel Level
Connecting the speakers
, there will be no sound from the surround back speakers. In this case,
Listening in surround sound
Connecting the speakers
YES
LARGE
OFF
Channel Level
Connecting the speakers
Channel Level
DIGITAL
on page 49).
LARGE
SBch ON
or
/ Subwoofer:
, or a very quiet setting (see
Listening in surround sound
or
(see
PLUS
(see
on page 49).
on page 49).
Speaker Setting
(see
Choosing the input signal
on page 29).
Speaker Setting
on page 19).
SMALL
(see
Using surround back channel processing
on page 32).
on page 29).
on page 19). If only one surround back
Speaker Setting
PLUS
(see
on page 19).
on page 48).
on page 48).
Speaker Setting
on page 48).
Speaker Setting
Setting the Audio options
on page 29).
on page 32).
on page 48).
on
SBch
on page 48).
on
No sound when using the System Setup or Status menu.
• If the HDMI input source is selected, sound is muted until exiting either menu.
• If sound is muted in the sub zone (
Other audio problems
Symptom Remedy
Broadcast stations cannot be selected automatically, or there is considerable noise in radio broadcasts.
A multichannel DVD source appears to be downmixed to 2 channels during playback.
For FM broadcasts
• Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and secure to a wall, etc.
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 22).
For AM broadcasts
• Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 22).
• Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a fluorescent light, motor, etc. Switch off or move the other equipment, or move the AM antenna.
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are selected (see on page 54).
ZONE 2
), it will be restored after exiting the System Setup menu.
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs
81
En
Page 82
13
Additional information
Symptom
Noise is output when scanning a DTS CD.
When playing a DTS format LD there is audible noise on the soundtrack.
Can’t record audio. • You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an analog recording from an analog
Recorded audio is different from the current source, or inaudible.
Subwoofer output is very low. • To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to
Everything seems to be set up correctly, but the playback sound is odd.
The
PHASE CONTROL
doesn’t seem to have an audible effect.
Noise or hum can be heard even when there is no sound being input.
There seems to be a time lag between the speakers and the output of the subwoofer.
Can’t use the SR+ features. • Make sure that HDMI Control is set to OFF (see
The maximum volume available (shown in the front panel display) is lower than the maximum.
No sound is output from the CD­R/TAPE OUT, DVR/VCR1 OUT or DVR/VCR2 OUT jack.
Can’t select ZONE 2. • Make sure that
+12dB
feature
Remedy
• This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your player alters the digital information, making it unreadable, resulting in noise being output. Lower the volume when scanning.
• Make sure that the input signal type is set to
source.
• For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t copy protected.
• Check that the
audio sources
• The
RECOUT
SOURCE
Setting
on page 48).
• The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker terminals on the receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers (see
• If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or the lowpass cutoff is set to the highest frequency setting. If there is a the subwoofer, the setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound).
• Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see
• Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same power source are not causing interference.
• See
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control)
your system again using MCACC (this will automatically compensate for a delay in the subwoofer output).
• This is not a malfunction. If the levels in volume will change accordingly.
• Make sure that
Audio Setup
Audio Setup
OUT
jacks are properly connected to the recorders input jacks (see
on page 18).
source is set to an input source other than the source you’re listening to. Select
to record the current input source (see
ZONE 2 / RECSEL Setting
on page 66).
ZONE 2 / RECSEL Setting
on page 66).
DIGITAL
(see
Choosing the input signal
Playing a different source when recording
PLUS
or set the front speakers to
Connecting the speakers
PHASE
setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º (or depending on
Speaker Distance
Setting the HDMI Control mode
Channel Level
in the
in the
on page 49 have been adjusted, the maximum
ZONE Audio Setup
ZONE Audio Setup
menu is set to
menu is set to
on page 32).
Connecting analog
SMALL
on page 8 to set up
on page 63).
RECSEL
ZONE 2
RECOUT
on page 70).
(see
Speaker
on page 19).
on page 49).
(see
(see
ZONE
ZONE
82
En
Video
Symptom Remedy
No image is output when an input is selected.
• Check the video connections of the source component (see page 16).
• For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is switched off (in same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.
• Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component video, HDMI or S-video cables (see
• Check the video output settings of the source component.
• Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.
• Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. If adjusting this receiver’s Resolution setting (in your component or display doesn’t work, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in on page 69)
Setting the Video options
The Input Setup menu
OFF
.
on page 69), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the
on page 64).
Setting the Video options
on page 69) and/or the resolution settings on
Setting the Video options
Page 83
Additional information
13
Symptom
Can’t record video. • Check that the source is not copy-protected.
Noisy, intermittent, or distorted picture.
Remedy
• The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the same type of video cable is used for connecting both the recorder and the video source (the one you want to record) to this receiver.
• Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display device using the same type of connection (component, S-video or composite), then start playback again.
Settings
Symptom Remedy
The Auto MCACC Setup continually shows an error.
After using the Auto MCACC Setup, the speaker size setting is incorrect.
Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker Distance setting (page 42) properly.
The display shows
ON
when you try to make
settings.
Most recent settings have been erased.
KEY LOCK
• The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as low as possible (see also
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup
will have to set up the surround sound manually (page 48).
• There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air-conditioner, motor, etc. Switch off all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again.
• Depending on a number of factors (room size, speaker placement, etc.) this may occur in some cases. Change the speaker setting manually in option for the
• Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals are matched up properly).
• With the receiver in standby, press  STANDBY/ON disable the key lock.
• The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.
Custom Menu
in
Speaker Setting
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
on page 9). If the noise level cannot be kept low enough, you
on page 48, and use the
on page 37 if this is a recurring problem.
while holding down the
ALL (Keep SP SYSTEM)
SPEAKERS
button to
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output
Symptom
The EQ response displayed in the graphical output following calibration does not appear entirely flat.
EQ adjustments made using the
Manual MCACC setup
page 40 do not appear to change the graphical output.
Lower frequency response curves do not seem to have been calibrated for
Graphical output data seems to have disappeared.
SMALL
on
speakers.
Remedy
• There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to compensate for room characteristics to achieve optimal sound.
• Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little or no adjustment needed.
• The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after measurements.
• Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not display these adjustments in the graphical output. However, these adjustments are taken this into account by the filters dedicated to overall system calibration.
• Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not change for speakers that have been specified as
• Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations, no measurable sound is output for display.
• If the power is switched off, the measurement data for graphical output to a PC is cleared.
SMALL
in the configuration, or do not output these frequencies.
Display
Symptom
The display is dark or off. • Press
After making an adjustment the display goes off.
Remedy
• Press
DIMMER
on the remote control repeatedly to select a different brightness.
DIMMER
on the remote control repeatedly to select a different brightness.
ALL CH ADJUST
in the Auto
83
En
Page 84
13
Additional information
Symptom
You can’t get when using the button.
The Dolby/DTS indicator doesn’t light when playing Dolby/DTS software.
When playing a DVD-Audio disc, the DVD player display shows
96 kHz
display does not.
During playback of a DTS 96/24 source, the display doesn’t show
96 kHz
When playing Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the receiver’s format indicators do not light.
When playing certain discs, none of the receiver’s format indicators light.
When playing a disc with the listening mode set to Auto Surround, the 2 indicator lights on the receiver.
During playback of a Surround EX or DTS-ES source on the
AUTO
indicators don’t light, or the signal is not properly processed.
During playback of DVD-Audio, the display shows
DIGITAL
to display
SIGNAL SELECT
. However, the receiver’s
.
PL II
or
Neo:6
setting, the EX and ES
PCM
.
SBch
Remedy
• Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned correctly (see
Setup menu
• If the multichannel analog inputs are selected, select a different input source.
• These indicators do dot light if playback is paused.
• Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source component.
• This is not a malfunction. 96 kHz audio from DVD-Audio discs is only output from the analog outputs of the DVD player. This receiver cannot show the playback sample rate when using the analog inputs.
• Make sure that the receiver is set to
• Check that the player is connected using a digital connection.
• Make sure that the receiver is set to
• Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are converted to PCM.
• Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or DTS is selected.
• The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc packaging for more on what audio tracks are recorded on the disc.
• Make sure that the receiver is set to
• If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround encoded), then this is not a malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details about the audio tracks available.
• The source may be Dolby Surround EX/DTS-ES software, but it has no flag to indicate it is 6.1 compatible. Set to EX or Standard EX listening mode (see
• This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection. This is not a malfunction.
on page 64).
SBch ON
AUTO
or
AUTO
or
AUTO
or
(see
Using surround back channel processing
Listening in surround sound
DIGITAL
DIGITAL
DIGITAL
(see
Choosing the input signal
(see
Choosing the input signal
(see
Choosing the input signal
on page 32) then switch to the THX Surround
on page 29).
The Input
on page 32).
on page 32).
on page 32).
84
En
Remote control
Symptom Remedy
Cannot be remote controlled. • Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see
Other components can’t be operated with the system remote.
The SR cable is connected, but the connected components can’t be operated with the remote.
• Be sure to operate within 7 m and a 30º angle of the remote sensor on the front panel (see
of remote control unit
• Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote control.
• Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote sensor.
• Check the connections of the
sensor
on page 79).
• If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the preset codes.
• The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset codes.
• Reinsert the SR cable, making sure it’s connected to the right jack (see
plasma display
• Make sure that there is an analog or HDMI connection between the units. This is necessary for the SR feature to work.
• Check that the other component is made by Pioneer. The SR feature only works with Pioneer equipment.
on page 25).
on page 59).
CONTROL IN
jack (see
HDMI
Symptom
The HDMI indicator blinks continuously.
Remedy
• Check all the points below.
Loading the batteries
Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s
on page 6).
Operating range
Using this receiver with a Pioneer
Page 85
Additional information
13
Symptom
No picture or sound. • This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCP-
No picture. • Try changing the Resolution setting (in
No sound, or sound suddenly ceases.
Noisy or distorted picture. • Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the video
HDCP ERROR
display.
shows in the
Remedy
compatible. If they are not, please connect them using the component, S-video or composite video jacks.
• Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with this receiver (even if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect using the component, S-video or composite video jacks between source and receiver.
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.
• If video images do not appear on your TV or plasma display, try adjusting the resolution, DeepColor or other setting for your component.
• If ‘
NOT SUPPORT
setting for your component.
• While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate connection for audio output.
• When this receiver reproduces MULTI CH IN audio sources with the HDMI setting set to THROUGH, you cannot hear audio output from all channels. In this case, make a digital or analog audio connection.
• To output signals in DeepColor, use an HDMI cable (compliant with Version 1.3a, Category 2) to connect this receiver to a component or TV with the DeepColor feature.
• Check that the HDMI AV setting is set to
• If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.
• If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate connection for the audio.
• Check the audio output settings of the source component.
quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display device using the same type of connection (component, S-video or composite), then start playback again.
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.
• Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP. If it is not compatible with HDCP, reconnect the source device using a different type of connection (component, S-video or composite). Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.
’ appears in the receiver’s display, try adjusting the resolution, DeepColor or other
Setting the Video options
AMP/THROUGH
on page 69).
.
iPod messages
Symptom Cause Action
Error I1
Error I2
No Music Track
Loading Error
Note
• If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
There is a problem with the signal path from the iPod to the receiver.
The software version being used with the iPod needs to be updated.
There are no playable songs currently stored in the iPod.
There is no responce from the iPod. Update the software being used with the iPod (please use the
Switch off the receiver and reconnect the iPod to the receiver. If this doesn’t seem to work, try resetting your iPod.
Update the software being used with the iPod (please use the latest iPod software versions later than the iPod updater 2004­10-20).
Input some music files compatible with iPod playback.
latest iPod software versions later than the iPod updater 2004­10-20).
85
En
Page 86
13
86
En
Additional information
Surround sound formats
Below is a brief description of the main surround sound formats you’ll find on DVDs, satellite, cable and terrestrial broadcasts, and video cassettes.
Dolby
The Dolby technologies are explained below. See www.dolby.com for more detailed information.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding system widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD and digital broadcast soundtracks. It can deliver up to six discrete audio channels, comprising five full range channels and a special LFE (low frequency effects) channel used mainly for deep, rumbling sound effects; hence the term “5.1-channel” Dolby Digital.
In addition to the format features above, Dolby Digital decoders offer downmixing for compatibility with mono, stereo and Dolby Pro Logic audio from a number of bit rates and channels. Another feature, called Dialog Normalization, attenuates programs based on the average level of dialog in a program relative to its peak level (also known as Dialnorm) in order to achieve uniform playback level.
Dolby Digital Surround EX
Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for EXtended) is an extension of Dolby Digital encoding whereby a surround back channel is matrixed into the surround left/right channels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel decoding, as well as for decoding using Dolby Digital EX.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) innovative “steering logic” circuit, this system extracts surround sound from sources as follows:
Dolby Pro Logic
from any stereo source
Dolby Pro Logic II
surround) from any stereo source
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
surround and surround back) from two channel or
5.1(and 6.1) channel sources
With two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is generated by bass management in the receiver.
Dolby Surround is an surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack, which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for enhanced surround listening with greater sound detail.
– 4.1 channel sound (mono surround)
decoding
– 5.1 channel sound (stereo
– 6.1 or 7.1 channel sound (stereo
encoding
system. Using the
system which embeds
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is the next-generation audio technology for all high-definition programming and media. It combines the efficiency to meet future broadcast demands with the power and flexibility to realize the full audio potential expected in the upcoming high-definition era. Built on Dolby Digital, the multi-channel audio standard for DVD and HD broadcasts worldwide, Dolby Digital Plus was designed for the next-generation A/V receivers but remains fully compatible with all current A/V receivers.
Dolby Digital Plus delivers multi-channel audio programs of up to 7.1 channels (*) and supports multiple programs in a single encoded bitstream with the maximum bit rate potential of up to 6 Mbps and the maximum bit rate performance of up to 3 Mbps on HD DVD and 1.7 Mbps on Blu-ray Disc, and it outputs Dolby Digital bitstreams for playback on existing Dolby Digital systems. Dolby Digital Plus can accurately reproduce the sound originally intended by directors and producers.
It also features multi-channel sound with discrete channel output, interactive mixing and streaming capability in advanced systems. Supported by High-Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a single-cable digital connection is possible for high-definition audio and video.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is the next-generation lossless encoding technology developed for high-definition optical discs in the upcoming era. Dolby TrueHD delivers tantalizing sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, unlocking the true high-definition entertainment experience on high-definition optical discs in the next generation. When coupled with high-definition video, Dolby TrueHD offers an unprecedented home theater experience with stunning sound and high­definition picture.
It supports bit rates of up to 18 Mbps and records up to 8 full­range channels (*) individually with 24-bit/96 kHz audio. It also features extensive metadata including dialogue normalization and dynamic range control. Supported by High-Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a single-cable digital connection is possible for high-definition audio and video.
HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc standards currently limit their maximum number of audio channels to eight, whereas Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD support more than eight audio channels.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Page 87
Additional information
13
DTS
The DTS technologies are explained below. See www.dtstech.com for more detailed information.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding system from DTS Inc. now widely used for DVD-Video, DVD-Audio,
5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and video games. It can deliver up to six discrete audio channels, comprising five full range channels, including an LFE channel. Higher sound quality is achieved through the use of a low compression rate, and high rates of transmittance during playback.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a decoder that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources. DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 gives ‘true’ 6.1 channel sound, with a completely separate (discrete) surround back channel. DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 has a surround back channel matrixed into the surround left/right channels. Both sources are also compatible with a conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder.
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 can generate 6.1 channel surround sound from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV) and from 5.1 channel sources. It uses both the channel information already encoded into the source, as well as its own processing to determine channel localization (with two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is generated by bass management in the receiver). Two modes (Cinema and Music) are available using DTS Neo:6 with two channel sources.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz/24-bit audio using a DTS 96/24 decoder. This format is also fully backward compatible with all existing decoders. This means that DVD players can play this software using a conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder.
DTS-EXPRESS
DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology supporting up to 5.1 channels with fixed data transfer rates. This format is incorporated with sub audio on HD DVD and secondary audio on Blu-ray Disc while boasting the potential applicability to upcoming broadcasts and memory audio contents.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers master audio sources recorded in a professional studio to listeners without any loss of data, preserving audio quality. DTS-HD Master Audio adopts variable data transfer rates, facilitating data transfer to the maximum rate of 24.5 Mbps in the Blu-ray disc format, 18.0 Mbps in the HD-DVD format, which by far exceeds that of a standard DVD. These high data
transfer rates enable lossless transmission of 96 kHz/24-bit
7.1-channel audio sources without deteriorating the quality of the original sound. DTS-HD Master Audio is an irreplaceable technology that can reproduce sound faithfully as intended by the creator of music or movies.
“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. and “DTS-HD Master Audio” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional (WMA9 Pro) is a discrete surround format developed by Microsoft Corporation.
WMA9 Pro can support up to 5.1/7.1 channel playback with sampling rates up to 24-bit/96 kHz. Using the unique WMA compression techniques, WMA9 Pro can deliver multichannel music and soundtracks over high-speed internet networks at low bit rates with minimal audio degradation. Playback may be enjoyed with the Windows Media Player 9 Series (or above) and other third-party media players on a personal computer, or with an AV amplifier with on-board WMA9 Pro decoding.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
About THX
The THX technologies are explained below. See www.thx.com for more detailed information.
THX Cinema processing
THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by THX Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended. Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home, correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX indicator is on, the following THX features are automatically added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX) (see page 88).
87
En
Page 88
13
Additional information
Re-Equalization
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie theaters using very different professional equipment. Re-Equalization restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a small home environment.
Timbre Matching
The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the direction from which the sound is coming. In a movie theatre, there is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to the side of your head. The Timbre Matching feature filters the information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers.
Adaptive Decorrelation
In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel’s time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This expands the listening position and creates—with only two speakers— the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre.
THX Select2
Before any home theatre component can be THX Select2 certified, it must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product feature the THX Select2 logo, which is your guarantee that the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come. THX Select2 requirements cover every aspect of the product including pre-amplifier and power amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital and analog domain.
THX Surround EX
THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com. Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home. This product may also engage the “THX Surround EX” mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded. In such case the information delivered to the Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of the individual listener.
Advanced Speaker Array (ASA)
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal surround sound experience. When you set up your home theater system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and Subwoofer) placing the two Surround Back speakers close together facing the front of the room as shown in the diagram will provide the largest sweet spot. If for practical reasons you have to place the Surround Back speakers apart, you will need to go THX Audio Set-up screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing, which will re-optimize the surround sound-field. ASA is used in three new modes; THX Select2 Cinema, THX MusicMode and THX Games Mode.
THX Select2 Cinema mode
THX Select2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all eight speakers giving you the best possible movie watching experience. In this mode, ASA processing blends the side surround speakers and back surround speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and directional surround sounds. DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in Select2 Cinema mode if the appropriate flag has been encoded. Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital flag that allows automatic switching. If you know that the movie that you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise THX Select2 Cinema mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum replay.
THX MusicMode
For the replay of multi-channel music the THX MusicMode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear soundstage.
THX Games Mode
For the replay of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX Games Mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately places all game audio surround information, providing a full 360 degree playback environment. THX Games Mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field.
THX and the THX logo are trademarks of THX Ltd. which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
About Neural Surround
VSX-LX70 only
Neural Surround represents the latest advancement in surround technology and has been adopted by FM Radio and Neural Music Direct for broadcasts of surround recordings and live events. Neural Surround employs psychoacoustic frequency domain processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with superior localization of surround elements. System playback is scalable from stereo up to state-of-the-art multichannel surround.
Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Corporation, THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
88
En
Page 89
Additional information
Listening modes with different input signal formats
The following charts outline the listening modes available with different input signal formats, depending on the surround back channel processing and decoding method you have selected.
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats
SBch Processing Input signal format Standard THX Auto Surround
SBch
Processing
ON/AUTO
(Automatically selects 6.1/7.1
channel decoding)
SBch
Processing
d
OFF
(Maximum 5.1
channel playback)
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
(except for 176.4 kHz/
192 kHz)
WMA9 Pro
(44.1 kHz/48 kHz)
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD
DTS-EXPRESS
WMA9 Pro
(88.2 kHz/96 kHz)
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
Dolby Digital Surround
DTS Surround
SACD
Other stereo sources
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
(except for 176.4 kHz/
192 kHz)
WMA9 Pro
(44.1 kHz/48 kHz)
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD
DTS-EXPRESS
WMA9 Pro
(88.2 kHz/96 kHz)
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
2
Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2
Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2
Pro Logic llx GAME
2
PRO LOGIC
Stereo playback
As above
2
Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2
Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2
Pro Logic llx GAME
2
PRO LOGIC
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
As above As above As above
2
Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2
Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2
Pro Logic llx GAME
2
PRO LOGIC
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
Neural THX
2
Pro Logic ll MOVIE
2
Pro Logic ll MUSIC
2
Pro Logic ll GAME
2
PRO LOGIC
Stereo playback
As above
a
a
a
c
2
2
2
2
Pro Logic llx MOVIE+THX
2
PRO LOGIC+THX
THX GAMES MODE
THX CINEMA
a b
Pro Logic llx MOVIE+THX
2
PRO LOGIC+THX
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
THX GAMES MODE
a
b
Pro Logic llx MOVIE+THX
2
PRO LOGIC+THX
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
THX GAMES MODE
Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX
2
PRO LOGIC+THX
THX CINEMA
a
b
Stereo playback
As above
As above
2
Pro Logic llx MOVIE
Neo:6 CINEMA
Stereo playback Stereo playback
Stereo playback
As above
As above
13
89
En
Page 90
13
Additional information
SBch Processing Input signal format Standard THX Auto Surround
SBch
Processing
d
OFF
(Maximum 5.1
channel playback)
a.2 Pro Logic b.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected. c.
VSX-LX70 only
d.Automatically selected if no surround back speakers are connected.
Multichannel signal formats
SBch Processing Input signal format Standard THX Auto Surround
SBch
Processing
ON
(7.1 channel
decoding used for
all sources)
Dolby Digital Surround
DTS Surround
SACD
Other stereo sources
has a maximum of 5.1 channel playback.
– Available only with the FM or HOME MEDIA GALLERY input.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
DTS-HD
DTS-HD Master Audio
WMA9 Pro (44.1 kHz/48 kHz)
PCM
(6.1/7.1 channel)
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
(except for 176.4 kHz/
192 kHz)
(5.1 channel)
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
(5.1 channel)
DTS-EXPRESS
DTS-HD
DTS-HD Master Audio
WMA9 Pro
(88.2 kHz/96 kHz)
(5.1 channel)
Dolby Digital EX
(6.1 channel flagged)
2
Pro Logic ll MOVIE
2
Pro Logic ll MUSIC
2
Pro Logic ll GAME
2
PRO LOGIC
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
As above As above As above
2
Pro Logic ll MOVIE
2
Pro Logic ll MUSIC
2
Pro Logic ll GAME
2
PRO LOGIC
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
Neural THX
a
c
Straight decoding
Dolby Digital EX
2
Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2
Pro Logic llx MUSIC
Straight decoding
Straight decoding
Dolby Digital EX
2
Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
2
Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2
Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX
2
PRO LOGIC+THX
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
2
Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX
2
PRO LOGIC+THX
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
THX CINEMA
a
THX SURROUND EX
2
Pro Logic llx MOVIE+THX
THX Select2 CINEMA
THX MUSICMODE
THX GAMES MODE
THX CINEMA
THX Select2 CINEMA
THX MUSICMODE
THX GAMES MODE
a
THX SURROUND EX
2
Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX
THX Select2 CINEMA
THX MUSICMODE
THX GAMES MODE
2
Pro Logic ll MOVIE
Neo:6 CINEMA
Stereo playback Stereo playback
Straight decoding
Dolby Digital EX
a
2
Pro Logic llx
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
Straight decoding
Straight decoding
Dolby Digital EX
a
2
a
MOVIE
Pro Logic IIx
a
MOVIE
90
En
Page 91
Additional information
SBch Processing Input signal format Standard THX Auto Surround
SBch
Processing
ON
(7.1 channel
decoding used for
all sources)
SBch
Processing
AUTO
(Automatically
selects 6.1/7.1
channel
decoding)
sources/6.1 channel flagged)
SBch
Processing
c
OFF
(Maximum 5.1
channel
playback)
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
b.ES processing is not carried out for certain DTS-ES signals input from HDMI.
c.Automatically selected if no surround back speakers are connected.
DTS-ESb
(6.1 channel sources/
6.1 channel flagged)
DTS and DTS 96/24
(5.1 channel encoding)
Dolby Digital
WMA9 Pro
(44.1 kHz/48 kHz)
PCM
(5.1 channel encoding)
SACD
(5.1 channel encoding)
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
DTS-HD
DTS-HD Master Audio
WMA9 Pro
PCM
(6.1/7.1 channel)
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
(5.1 channel)
Dolby Digital EX
(6.1 channel flagged)
DTS-ESb (6.1 channel
Other 5.1 channel sources
(5.1 channel encoding)
SACD
(5.1 channel encoding)
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
SACD
(5.1 channel)
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel
sources
DTS-ES
(Matrix/Discrete)
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
DTS+
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
Dolby Digital EX
2
Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2
Pro Logic llx MUSIC
Dolby Digital EX
2
Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2
Pro Logic llx MUSIC
MOVIE
DTS+Neo:6
2
Pro Logic llx
MOVIE
a
a
a
a
Straight decoding
Straight decoding
Dolby Digital EX
2
Pro Logic llx MOVIE
DTS-ES
(Matrix/Discrete)
Straight decoding
(Maximum 5.1 channel
playback)
Straight decoding
(Maximum 5.1 channel
playback)
a
Straight decoding
As above
DTS-ES+THX
DTS+2
MOVIE
(Matrix/Discrete)
Pro Logic llx
a
+
THX
THX Select2 CINEMA
THX MUSICMODE
THX GAMES MODE
DTS+Neo:6+THX
DTS+
2
Pro Logic llx
MOVIE+THX
a
THX Select2 CINEMA
THX MUSICMODE
THX GAMES MODE
THX SURROUND EX
2
Pro Logic llx MOVIE+THX
THX Select2 CINEMA
THX MUSICMODE
THX GAMES MODE
THX MUSICMODE
THX CINEMA
DTS-ES
a
a
a
DTS+Neo:6
a
a
a
Dolby Digital EX
a
a
a
a
2
Dolby Digital EX
2
Straight decoding
Straight decoding
THX SURROUND EX Dolby Digital EX
2
DTS-ES+THX
THX CINEMA
one surround back speaker)
(Matrix/Discrete)
THX Select2 CINEMA
(Maximum 5.1 channel
playback with only
THX MUSICMODE
a
DTS-ES
Straight decoding
(Maximum 5.1 channel
Straight decoding
(Maximum 5.1 channel
Straight decoding
THX CINEMA
(Matrix/Discrete)
Pro Logic llx
a
MOVIE
Pro Logic llx
a
MOVIE
Pro Logic llx
a
MOVIE
(Matrix/Discrete)
playback)
playback)
As above
13
91
En
Page 92
13
Additional information
Stream direct with different input signal formats
The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the Stream Direct mode (see
Using Stream Direct
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats
Surround Back speaker(s) Input signal format DIRECT PURE DIRECT
Connected
(Maximum 7.1 channel playback)
Not connected
(Maximum 5.1 channel playback)
a.SACD DIRECT (
on page 31) you have selected.
VSX-LX70
) or Straight decoding (
Dolby Digital Surround
DTS Surround
Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback
Analog sources
PCM sources
DVD-A sources
SACD sources
Dolby Digital Surround
DTS Surround
Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback
Analog sources
PCM sources
DVD-A sources
SACD sources
VSX-LX60
)
2
Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
Neo:6 CINEMA Neo:6 CINEMA
As above As above As above As above
2
Pro Logic II MOVIE
Neo:6 CINEMA Neo:6 CINEMA
As above As above As above As above
2
Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
PCM DIRECT (stereo) PCM DIRECT (stereo)
SACD DIRECT (stereo)
2
Pro Logic II MOVIE
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
PCM DIRECT (stereo) PCM DIRECT (stereo)
SACD DIRECT (stereo)
a
a
Multichannel signal formats
Surround Back speaker(s) Input signal format
Connected
(Maximum 7.1 channel playback)
Not connected
(Maximum 5.1 channel playback)
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected. b.SACD DIRECT (
VSX-LX70
) or Straight decoding (
Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel flagged)
DVD-A sources/Muti-ch PCM Straight decoding PCM DIRECT
SACD sources
(5.1 channel encoding)
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources
DVD-A sources/Muti-ch PCM Straight decoding PCM DIRECT
SACD sources
(5.1 channel encoding)
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources
VSX-LX60
)
DIRECT PURE DIRECT
Dolby Digital EX
2
Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
DTS-ES
(Matrix/Discrete)
As above
As above
As above
As above
a
2
Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
DTS-ES
Dolby Digital EX
(Matrix/Discrete)
SACD DIRECT
Straight decoding
SACD DIRECT
Straight decoding
a
b
b
92
En
Page 93
Additional information
Specifications
Amplifier Section
Maximum Output Power (1 kHz, THD 10.0 %, 6
. . . . . . . . . . . .270 W/channel (LX70), 250 W/channel (LX60)
Continuous Power Output
(DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 6 Ω)
Front. . . . . . . 180 W + 180 W (LX70), 170 W + 170 W (LX60)
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 W (LX70), 170 W (LX60)
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 W + 180 W (LX70)
170 W + 170 W (LX60)
Surround back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 W + 180 W (LX70)
170 W + 170 W (LX60) (DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 8 Ω)
Front. . . . . . . 150 W + 150 W (LX70), 140 W + 140 W (LX60)
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 W (LX70), 140 W (LX60)
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 W + 150 W (LX70)
140 W + 140 W (LX60)
Surround back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 W + 150 W (LX70)
140 W + 140 W (LX60)
Rated Power Output (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09 %, 8 Ω)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 W+140 W (LX70), 130 W+130 W (LX60)
Audio Section
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)
LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 mV/47 k
Frequency Response (LINE). . . . . . .5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB
Output (Level/Impedance)
REC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 mV/2.2 k
Tone Control
BASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 6 dB (100 Hz)
TREBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 6 dB (10 kHz)
LOUDNESS. . . . . . . . . . +4 dB / +2 dB (100 Hz / 10 kHz)
(at volume position –40 dB)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)
LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio [DIN (continuous rated power output/50 mW)]
LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 dB/65 dB
Composite Video / S-Video Section
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75
Output (Level/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 dB
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Hz to 10 MHz
Component Video Section
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75
Output (Level/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 dB
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Hz to 100 MHz
)
FM Tuner Section
Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz
Usable Sensitivity . . . . . . .Mono: 15.2 dBf, IHF (1.6 µV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mono: 20.2 dBf
Sensitivity (DIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mono: 1.1 µV (S/N 26 dB)
Stereo: 50 µV (S/N 46 dB)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . Mono: 76 dB (at 85 dBf)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (DIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mono: 62 dB
Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stereo: 0.6 % (1 kHz)
Alternate Channel Selectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .70 dB (400 kHz)
Stereo Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 dB (1 kHz)
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Hz to 15 kHz ± 1dB
Antenna Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Ω unbalanced
Stereo: 41.2 dBf
Stereo: 72 dB (at 85 dBf)
AM Tuner Section
Frequency Range . . . . . . . 531 kHz to 1602 kHz (9 kHz step)
Sensitivity (IHF, Loop antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 µV/m
Selectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 dB
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna
530 kHz to 1700 kHz (10 kHz step)
Miscellaneous
Power Requirements
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AC 220 V/230 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 W
In standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.65 W (HDMI Control OFF)
Dimensions . . . . . .420 (W) mm x 187 (H) mm x 459 (D) mm
Weight (without package). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 kg
0.8 W (HDMI Control ON)
Furnished Parts
Setup microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) . . . . . . . . . 1
AA/IEC R6P dry cell batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Remote control unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Antenna adapter
Flat-bladed converter plug
These operating instructions Operating instructions for HOME MEDIA GALLERY (
VSX-LX70 only
Ω Ω
Note
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
)
• Specifications and the design are subject to possible modifications without notice, due to improvements.
Ω Ω
13
Stereo: 58 dB
93
En
Page 94
13
94
En
Additional information
Cleaning the unit
• Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and dirt.
• When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six times with water, and wrung out well, and then wipe again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or cleansers.
• Never use thinners, benzine, insecticide sprays or other chemicals on or near this unit, since these will corrode the surface.
Our philosophy
Pioneer is dedicated to making your home theater listening experience as close as possible to the vision of the moviemakers and mastering engineer when they created the original soundtrack. We do this by focusing on three important steps:
1 Achieving the highest possible sound quality
2 Allowing for customized acoustic calibration according to any listening area
3 Fine-tuning the receiver with the help of world­class studio engineers
1
With the cooperation of AIR Studios, this receiver has been designated
AIR Studios Monitor Reference:
Features
Easy setup using Advanced MCACC
The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate surround sound setup, which includes the advanced features of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ. This innovative technology measures the reverb characteristics of your listening area, allowing you to customize your system calibration with the help of a graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or using a computer. With the additional benefits of numerous MCACC preset memories, standing wave control and microphone measurements from a series of reference points, your home theater experience can be truly customized for optimal surround sound.
HOME MEDIA GALLERY
This receiver can play back contents stored on your computer when your computer is connected to the LAN terminal of this receiver. Also, you can listen to the Internet radio stations.
1
(
VSX-LX70 only
)
Dolby Digital and DTS decoding, including Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-EXPRESS and DTS-HD Master Audio
Dolby Digital and DTS decoding brings theater sound right into your home with up to six channels of surround sound, including a special LFE (Low Frequency Effects) channel for deep, realistic sound effects.
The built-in Dolby Pro Logic IIx and DTS Neo:6 decoders not only provide full surround sound decoding for Dolby Surround sources, but will also generate convincing surround sound for any stereo source.
Also, with the addition of a surround back speaker, you can take advantage of the built-in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES decoders for six-channel surround sound.
Furthermore, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD, which are designed for the next-generation high­definition media such as Blu-ray Disc and HD DVD, support up to 7.1 channels and 8 channels respectively.
DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology supporting up to 5.1 channels, with fixed data transfer rates ranging from 24 kbps to 256 kbps (this encoding is available only when signals are delivered to this receiver as primary audio).
DTS-HD Master Audio delivers audio signals to listeners without any loss of data with its high transfer rates.
Phase Control
The Phase Control feature corrects the phase distortion as well as group delay for LFE (Low-Frequency Effects) audio signals during multichannel playback.
Full Band Phase Control
The Full Band Phase Control feature analyzes the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers connected and corrects the phase distortion to the flattened frequency-phase characteristics. This correction minimizes the group delay of the middle- and low-frequency ranges against the high-frequency range and improves the frequency-phase characteristics across all ranges. Furthermore, the enhanced frequency­phase characteristics between channels ensure better surround sound integration.
HDMI and digital video conversion
This receiver is compatible with the HDMI digital video format (HDMI Version 1.3), providing you with high­definition digital video/audio via a single cable. High-quality sound formats such as DTS-HD and Dolby TrueHD are supported while this receiver is also compatible with the DeepColor feature. You can operate this receiver in synchronization with your Pioneer component that supports the HDMI Control function by connecting your component to this receiver via HDMI. Also, the built-in digital video converter of this receiver makes both de-interlacing and up-scaling possible, and analog video signals being input are converted and output as digital video signals at the HDMI terminal.
Page 95
Additional information
13
DCDi
Faroudja’s DCDi Processing is selectable and ensures that images are smooth and natural, without staircasing or jaggies.
Pioneer Authorized Distributors
Pioneer Authorized Distributors
REP. OF SOUTH AFRICA
AFRICATEK (PTY) LTD.
29 Heronmere Road, Reuven Booysens. Johannesburg 2091 P.O.Box 121 Linmeyer 2105 TEL: 490 9202
HONG KONG
PIONEER (HK) LTD.
Suites 901-906, 9/F, World Commerce Centre, Harbour City, 11 Canton Road, Tsim Sha Tsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong TEL: 2848-6488
INDONESIA
P.T. ADAB ALAM ELECTRONIC
Jl. K.H. Zainul Arifin No. 13A Jakarta-Pusat TEL: + (021) 6331924, 6331859, 6337665, 6337767
MALAYSIA
PIONEER TECHNOLOGY (M) SDN. BHD
16th Floor, Menara Uni. Asia 1008, Jalan Sultan Ismail 50250, Kuala Lumpur
TEL: 03 2697 2920
PHILIPPINES
MGM ELECTRONICS CORP.
708 Apelo Cruz St. Malibay P.O. Box 473, Pasay city
TEL: (02)8526706
SINGAPORE
PIONEER ASIACENTRE PTE LTD. Domestic Service Dept.
253, Alexandra Road #04-01 Singapore, 159936 TEL: 64727555
iPod Ready
With the new iPod terminal, you’ll be up and running in no time, now that this receiver’s enhanced compatibility makes on-screen control of your iPod an added possibility.
THAILAND
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (THAILAND) CO., LTD.
FL. 1 & 7 Chaiyo Building. 91/1 Rama 9Rd. Huaykwang, Bangkok 10320, TEL: 02-6439511
U.A.E. PIONEER GULF FZE
Lob 11-017, Jebel Ali Free Zone, P. O. Box 61226, Jebel Ali, Dubai, U.A.E. TEL: 971-4-881-5756
AUSTRALIA
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
Melbourne: 178-184 Boundary Rd., Braeside, Victoria. 3195 TEL: (03)9586 6300 Sydney: Unit D. 15 Rodborough Rd, French Forest, New South Wales, 2086 TEL: (02)9452 0200
NEW ZEALAND
MONACO CORP. LTD.
10 Rothwell Ave., Albany. Auckland P. O. Box 4399, Auckland 1 TEL: 94157444
MEXICO
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A.DE C.V.
Blvd. Manuel Avila Camacho138 piso 10 Colonia Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000 TEL: 52-55-9178-4270
REP. OF PANAMA
PIONEER INTERNATIONAL LATIN AMERICA, S.A.
P. O. Box 5140, Panama 5, Republic of Panama TEL: 507-210-1466
When using the Advanced MCACC setup, you have the option of displaying the results using a computer. To obtain the software for this feature (as referred to in Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 61), please contact the Pioneer Authorized Distributor for your area as listed above.
95
En
Page 96
.
.
A
.
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
K002_B_En
ublished by Pioneer Corporation
Copyright
ll rights reserved
2007 Pioneer Corporation
Printed in <ARB7382-A>
Loading...